[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2015125589A1 - X-ray imaging apparatus - Google Patents

X-ray imaging apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2015125589A1
WO2015125589A1 PCT/JP2015/052745 JP2015052745W WO2015125589A1 WO 2015125589 A1 WO2015125589 A1 WO 2015125589A1 JP 2015052745 W JP2015052745 W JP 2015052745W WO 2015125589 A1 WO2015125589 A1 WO 2015125589A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
ray
imaging apparatus
detector
arm
ray imaging
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/JP2015/052745
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
明敏 勝又
政廣 辻田
竜也 長野
昌也 北尾
浩一 尾川
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Telesystems Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Telesystems Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2014031911A external-priority patent/JP2015156886A/en
Priority claimed from JP2014037037A external-priority patent/JP2015159973A/en
Application filed by Telesystems Co Ltd filed Critical Telesystems Co Ltd
Publication of WO2015125589A1 publication Critical patent/WO2015125589A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B6/00Apparatus or devices for radiation diagnosis; Apparatus or devices for radiation diagnosis combined with radiation therapy equipment
    • A61B6/50Apparatus or devices for radiation diagnosis; Apparatus or devices for radiation diagnosis combined with radiation therapy equipment specially adapted for specific body parts; specially adapted for specific clinical applications
    • A61B6/51Apparatus or devices for radiation diagnosis; Apparatus or devices for radiation diagnosis combined with radiation therapy equipment specially adapted for specific body parts; specially adapted for specific clinical applications for dentistry
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B6/00Apparatus or devices for radiation diagnosis; Apparatus or devices for radiation diagnosis combined with radiation therapy equipment
    • A61B6/02Arrangements for diagnosis sequentially in different planes; Stereoscopic radiation diagnosis
    • A61B6/03Computed tomography [CT]
    • A61B6/032Transmission computed tomography [CT]
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B6/00Apparatus or devices for radiation diagnosis; Apparatus or devices for radiation diagnosis combined with radiation therapy equipment
    • A61B6/02Arrangements for diagnosis sequentially in different planes; Stereoscopic radiation diagnosis
    • A61B6/03Computed tomography [CT]
    • A61B6/032Transmission computed tomography [CT]
    • A61B6/035Mechanical aspects of CT
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B6/00Apparatus or devices for radiation diagnosis; Apparatus or devices for radiation diagnosis combined with radiation therapy equipment
    • A61B6/10Safety means specially adapted therefor
    • A61B6/107Protection against radiation, e.g. shielding
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B6/00Apparatus or devices for radiation diagnosis; Apparatus or devices for radiation diagnosis combined with radiation therapy equipment
    • A61B6/44Constructional features of apparatus for radiation diagnosis
    • A61B6/4405Constructional features of apparatus for radiation diagnosis the apparatus being movable or portable, e.g. handheld or mounted on a trolley
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B6/00Apparatus or devices for radiation diagnosis; Apparatus or devices for radiation diagnosis combined with radiation therapy equipment
    • A61B6/44Constructional features of apparatus for radiation diagnosis
    • A61B6/4429Constructional features of apparatus for radiation diagnosis related to the mounting of source units and detector units
    • A61B6/4452Constructional features of apparatus for radiation diagnosis related to the mounting of source units and detector units the source unit and the detector unit being able to move relative to each other
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B6/00Apparatus or devices for radiation diagnosis; Apparatus or devices for radiation diagnosis combined with radiation therapy equipment
    • A61B6/44Constructional features of apparatus for radiation diagnosis
    • A61B6/4429Constructional features of apparatus for radiation diagnosis related to the mounting of source units and detector units
    • A61B6/447Constructional features of apparatus for radiation diagnosis related to the mounting of source units and detector units the source unit or the detector unit being mounted to counterpoise or springs

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an X-ray imaging apparatus using X-rays, and in particular, faces an X-ray tube and a detector that detects X-rays irradiated from the X-ray tube and transmitted through an imaging region of a subject. And an X-ray imaging apparatus having a structure for rotating the X-ray tube and the detector around a subject.
  • a panoramic imaging apparatus that obtains a panoramic image in which a curved dentition is developed in a two-dimensional plane has been put into practical use.
  • This panoramic imaging apparatus normally has a pair of an X-ray tube and a detector having vertically long two-dimensionally arranged pixels around the oral cavity of a subject along a dentition whose rotation center is assumed.
  • a mechanism for rotating the center of rotation in a complicated manner so as to draw a trajectory is provided.
  • a constant value is maintained between the X-ray tube and the detector.
  • the above-described constant trajectory is a trajectory for focusing on a reference tomographic plane (a tomographic plane existing three-dimensionally) set in advance along a dentition regarded as a standard shape and size.
  • a reference tomographic plane a tomographic plane existing three-dimensionally
  • X-rays emitted from the X-ray tube are transmitted through the subject at regular intervals, and detected as digital frame data by the detector.
  • frame data focused on the reference tomographic plane is collected at regular intervals. This frame data is reconstructed by the tomosynthesis method to obtain a panoramic image of the reference tomographic plane.
  • Patent Document 6 discloses an example of a panoramic imaging apparatus having an imaging system in which an X-ray tube and a detector can both rotate independently of each other so as to form a circular orbit around the same center point. .
  • the jaw is positioned in the circular orbit.
  • the velocity pattern of the X-ray tube and the detector is controlled so that the X-ray irradiated from the X-ray tube always faces the detection surface of the detector.
  • JP-A-57-203430 JP-A-6-88790 JP-A-10-295680 US Patent Publication US2006 / 0203959 A1 JP2007-136163A International Publication WO2012 / 008492
  • the present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides an X-ray imaging apparatus with low X-ray exposure that can increase the degree of freedom in setting a focal plane in an imaging space, that is, setting an X-ray path trajectory. Its main purpose is to do.
  • X-ray imaging with low X-ray exposure with the ability to increase the degree of freedom of setting a partial focal plane and X-ray path in the imaging space, and accurately teaching the desired precision imaging range
  • Another object is to provide a device.
  • another object is to provide an X-ray imaging apparatus with low X-ray exposure that is easy to convey and easy to position, and can increase the degree of freedom in setting a focal plane in the imaging space.
  • an X-ray imaging apparatus has an X-ray tube having a point-like focal point and irradiating X-rays having a spread from the focal point, A detector that detects the X-rays emitted from the X-ray tube and outputs data corresponding to the amount of the X-rays, and passes the X-ray tube and the detector through a predetermined center of rotation. It is configured to be rotatable around a central axis.
  • the apparatus is configured such that the X-ray tube receives the X-ray so that the X-ray tube is accommodated, and the tube accommodating portion is rotatable around a first axis parallel to the central axis.
  • An X-ray tube arm having a tube support portion to support, a first driving means for rotating the tube housing portion around the first axis with respect to the tube support portion, and the X-ray incident thereon
  • a detector including a detector accommodating portion that accommodates the detector and a detector supporting portion that rotatably supports the detector accommodating portion around a second axis parallel to the central axis.
  • Third driving means that supports the same axis so as to be drivable and drives both arms to rotate around the central axis. The first and second in accordance with a speed pattern in which the X-ray tube arm, the detector arm, the tube housing portion, and the detector housing portion are rotated independently of each other for scanning by the X-ray.
  • control means for controlling the third drive means.
  • the first distance from the central axis to the first axis is set to a value larger than the second distance from the central axis to the second axis, and the X-ray tube And the detector can be rotated along different circular orbits.
  • the X-ray tube and the detector are rotated independently of each other around the same central axis passing through one rotation center.
  • the X-ray tube and the detector can be rotated around first and second axes parallel to the rotational axis at their respective rotational positions. That is, since both the X-ray tube and the detector can rotate (attitude control), the two can always be kept facing each other.
  • the configuration is relatively simple and can be miniaturized.
  • the X-ray path can be easily changed, so that the imaging space can be drawn from various angles. For this reason, various focal planes can be set in the imaging space.
  • the imaging is performed by irradiating the imaging part of the subject located in the imaging space between the tube housing part and the detector housing part with a laser beam simulating the actual irradiation of the X-ray.
  • Teaching means capable of instructing a partial imaging range of a part before imaging; setting means for decoding the partial imaging range instructed by the teaching means and setting the speed pattern according to the decoding result; , Is provided.
  • an X having a function of increasing the degree of freedom in setting a partial focal plane in an imaging space and setting an X-ray path and teaching a desired precision imaging range accurately.
  • a line imaging apparatus can be provided.
  • the imaging space that holds the X-ray tube arm and the detector arm rotatably and allows the X-ray tube arm and the detector arm to rotate around the specific part.
  • the X-ray imaging apparatus moves to the back of the dental treatment chair, is positioned on the rear side of the dental treatment chair, and lies on the back of the dental treatment chair.
  • An apparatus for performing X-ray imaging by positioning a head in an imaging space between the X-ray tube and the detector, an operation unit operated by an operator, and transmission for transmitting an operation given to the operation unit Means, a position specifying means for specifying a predetermined position when the X-ray imaging apparatus is laid on the chair, and the X-ray imaging by being locked to the position specifying means according to the operation transmitted by the transmitting means.
  • Fixing means for fixing the device in the predetermined position.
  • FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a front side of an X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus as an X-ray imaging apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the back of the X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus as the X-ray imaging apparatus according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 3 is a perspective view for explaining the positional relationship between the X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus and the dental treatment chair and the position of the subject at the time of imaging.
  • FIG. 4 is a partial cross-sectional view illustrating a scattered radiation shielding plate built in the bottom surface.
  • FIG. 5 is a perspective view for explaining the scattered radiation shielding cover.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a four-surface shielding structure including a scattered radiation shielding cover that covers the upper surface and both side surfaces and a scattered radiation shielding plate that covers the bottom surface portion.
  • FIG. 7 is a side view for explaining the 4-axis independent drive of the X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus.
  • FIG. 8 is a front view for explaining the 4-axis independent drive of the X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus.
  • FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing a part of the electrical configuration of the X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between a standard dentition, a 3D reference tomographic plane, and an X-ray path.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between a standard dentition, a 3D reference tomographic plane, and an X-ray path.
  • FIG. 11 is a graph illustrating a speed pattern instructing partial revolutions of the X-ray tube and the detector related to two axes in the four-axis independent control.
  • FIG. 12 is a graph illustrating a speed pattern instructing partial revolutions of the X-ray tube and the detector relating to the remaining two axes of the four-axis independent control.
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure for panoramic shooting.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining a typical rotational position of the X-ray tube and the detector during panoramic imaging and a state of positioning by a laser beam.
  • FIG. 15 is a perspective view of the internal structure of the apparatus main body mounted on the X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus according to the first modification as seen from the front.
  • FIG. 15 is a perspective view of the internal structure of the apparatus main body according to the first modification when viewed from the rear.
  • FIG. 17 is a perspective view illustrating a scattered radiation shielding cover according to the second modification. It is a figure explaining the conventional dental X-ray used in order to explain the X-ray panoramic imaging device concerning the 2nd embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining teaching employed in the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a configuration corresponding to the teaching device according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining teaching.
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining teaching processing.
  • FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining calculation of control data in teaching.
  • FIG. 24 is a flowchart for explaining the procedure of the partial shooting operation.
  • FIG. 24 is a flowchart for explaining the procedure of the partial shooting operation.
  • FIG. 25 is a graph illustrating a speed pattern of a target tooth related to partial imaging when it is assumed that there is a dentition along a standard trajectory.
  • FIG. 26 is a side view for explaining the position of the scattered radiation shielding plate provided on the back surface of the X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining the attachment of an X-ray protective curtain that can be used in the third embodiment and that is detachably disposed on the front side during imaging.
  • FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating a six-side shielding structure when the scattered radiation shielding means shown in both FIG. 26 and FIG. 27 is employed.
  • FIG. 29 is a side view showing an X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus and a floor fixing unit according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing an X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus and a floor fixing unit according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 31 is a front view and a side view of the operation lever.
  • FIG. 32 is a schematic view taken along the line IX-IX in FIG. 32 for explaining the outline and operation of the link mechanism from the operation lever to the positioning pin together with the positioning operation of the positioning pin.
  • FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a cross-sectional structure taken along lines II and II-II in FIG.
  • FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining the structure of the positioning pin and the vertical movement operation.
  • FIG. 35 is a perspective view of the floor fixing portion.
  • FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional view along a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the floor fixing portion.
  • FIG. 37 is a block diagram showing the connection of sensors, LEDs, and processors for detecting the vertical movement of the positioning pins.
  • FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the position detection means of the floor fixing portion for positioning.
  • FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining another modified example of the position detecting means of the floor fixing portion for positioning.
  • the panoramic imaging apparatus 1 is configured as a dental diagnostic apparatus that captures a panoramic image of a subject's jaw (including a dentition).
  • the panoramic imaging apparatus 1 teaches the apparatus 1 itself the angle and range of X-ray irradiation for performing the precision imaging, and reflects the taught angle and range.
  • the teaching device for setting the control data is functionally integrated.
  • this panoramic imaging apparatus a pseudo three-dimensional tomographic image of the subject's jaw (the image itself is a two-dimensional image, but three-dimensionally according to the shape of an imaging region such as a dentition).
  • the displayed cross-sectional image) can be taken.
  • region of the dentition of a jaw part more precisely can also be performed.
  • the control of the rotational operation for precision photographing is based on an original control method called “4-axis independent control”.
  • the “4-axis independent control” employs a unique anti-scattering structure because the apparatus is portable and can be used on the side of the dental treatment chair 2. For this reason, first, the configuration of the entire apparatus including the scattered radiation prevention structure will be described, followed by the description of the configuration of the 4-axis independent control, and then the configuration of the teaching device for precision imaging.
  • the X-ray imaging apparatus is configured as a panoramic imaging apparatus, but the X-ray imaging apparatus is not necessarily limited to the dental field.
  • This X-ray imaging apparatus may be configured to image various other parts such as otolaryngology imaging and bone / joint parts of limbs.
  • this X-ray imaging apparatus may be implemented as an X-ray CT apparatus.
  • FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 show the appearance of the dental X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus 1 according to this embodiment from the front side and from the back side.
  • FIG. 3 shows a state in which the panoramic photographing apparatus 1 is used while being positioned on the side of the dental treatment chair 2.
  • the panoramic photographing apparatus 1 includes a pedestal portion 12 on which four casters 11 (moving means) are mounted, a power supply box 13 mounted on the pedestal portion 12, and a pedestal portion 12. And a console 15 equipped with a computer for controlling and image processing.
  • the console 15 is connected to the main body BD of the apparatus 1 via a cable or via wireless communication.
  • the main body BD means an apparatus portion excluding the console 15 and a floor fixing portion 53 (see FIG. 3) described later.
  • the casters 11 are provided at the four corners of the lower surface of the base 12. For this reason, the dentist or the operator can move by pushing the panoramic imaging apparatus 1 and can freely move from room to room or between the room place and the side of the dental treatment chair 2. .
  • the caster 11 can be locked and unlocked by depressing or raising a pedal 11P (see FIG. 2).
  • the elevator 14 includes an elevating mechanism (not shown) in its interior, and is electrically driven with respect to the pedestal portion 12 (that is, the floor surface, that is, the dental treatment chair 2) in an arbitrary range of height (eg, 10 to 15 cm). It is configured to be movable up and down at a height position.
  • the power supply box 13 includes a power supply circuit that supplies necessary power to each part of the system.
  • the elevator 14 provides an imaging space S having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape for performing X-ray scanning with the head H of the patient P positioned as shown in FIG.
  • XYZ orthogonal coordinates as shown in the figure can be set if the vertical movement direction of the elevator 14 is the Y axis. Since the head H of the patient P is positioned in the imaging space (object space) S as shown in FIG. 3 at the time of X-ray imaging, the direction of the Z axis is the direction from the top of the head H toward the toes (median) Line direction). For this reason, the direction of the Z axis coincides with the body axis direction. Furthermore, since the direction of the Z axis is also the front-rear direction of the device 1, it can also be called the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the side where the head H of the subject P is put into the imaging space S of the panoramic imaging apparatus 1 is referred to as the front surface (front surface), and the opposite surface is referred to as the rear surface (back surface).
  • the elevator 14 includes a bottom surface portion 14A located on the lower side thereof and a back surface portion 14B located on the bottom surface portion 14A in contact with the bottom surface portion 14A on the back surface side in the X-axis direction. Further, the elevator 14 further includes a scattered radiation shielding cover (part of the shielding body) which overlaps and overlaps both sides of the bottom surface portion 14A, that is, both sides in the X-axis direction and can be manually slid in the front-rear direction. ) 14C.
  • the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C is supported by rails RL provided on both lateral sides of the bottom surface portion 14A, and is slidably engaged in the front-rear direction. In order to perform this slide manually, a handle 16 is attached to the upper side and the rear side of the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C.
  • the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C serves as a first shielding body that shields scattered radiation of X-rays.
  • the bottom surface portion 14A is formed of a member formed by folding a rectangular resin or metal plate and joining both ends thereof to have a certain height and bend toward the outside in the height direction, that is, the Y-axis direction.
  • the inside of this bending member is hollow. The reason for this curvature is that the imaging space S is secured as wide as possible and the design is taken into consideration.
  • a scattered radiation shielding plate (second shielding member) 20 made of a lead plate is attached to the upper side of the cavity inside the bottom surface portion 14A.
  • a part of the edge in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) of the scattered radiation shielding plate 20 is folded along the folding of the bottom surface portion 14A in the height direction (Y-axis direction).
  • the lead plate has a thickness of 0.3 mm and functions as a second shielding body that shields scattered X-ray rays.
  • a mechanism part including a drive system including a motor, a power transmission mechanism, and the like and an encoder (rotational position sensor) for monitoring the operation of the drive system is built in the back surface portion 14B of the elevator 14.
  • two arms 21 and 22 coupled to two electric motors that can rotate independently of each other project from the back surface portion 14B into the imaging space S.
  • These arms 21 and 22 have an L-shaped X-ray tube arm 21 with an X-ray tube 23 for irradiating fan-shaped X-rays at the tip side and a detector 24 for detecting X-rays at the tip side.
  • L-shaped detector arm 22 is an L-shaped X-ray tube arm 21 with an X-ray tube 23 for irradiating fan-shaped X-rays at the tip side and a detector 24 for detecting X-rays at the tip side.
  • the other ends of the arms 21 and 22 are coaxially linked around the rotation center O and can rotate independently of each other (see arrows T and D in FIG. 1).
  • the motor is, for example, a stepping motor, and its rotational position is detected by an encoder (not shown).
  • a virtual straight line passing through the rotation center O and parallel to the Z axis is referred to as a central axis CA.
  • the central axis CA is an axis that can also be called the rotation center axis of the arm, and is physically different from the rotation center O of the arm, but is present at the same position when observing along the Z-axis direction. .
  • each of the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22 supports only the tip side portion, that is, the portion containing the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 on the support side, that is, the back surface portion 14B.
  • the support portion can be independently rotated within a predetermined angle range with respect to the support portion side. Arrows T1 and D1 in FIG. 1 indicate this rotation. That is, the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 have a total of four degrees of freedom of independent rotation with respect to the back surface portion 14B.
  • the X-ray tube 23 incorporates a collimator (not shown). This collimator collimates the X-rays irradiated by the X-ray tube 23 according to the shape of the X-ray incident window WD of the detector 24.
  • the X-ray incident window WD has an elongated two-dimensional opening. For this reason, the X-rays irradiated from the X-ray tube 23 are narrowed down to a fan beam XB having a rectangular cross section in accordance with the size of the X-ray incident window WD.
  • the detector 24 has a structure in which a plurality of modules in which semiconductor elements that directly convert X-rays into electrical signals are arranged in two-dimensional pixels are arranged in a plurality of columns.
  • the head H of the subject P is located in the imaging space S as will be described later.
  • the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 are positioned substantially opposite to each other across the jaw.
  • the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 rotate independently of each other over the head H over an angle range of, for example, 220 ° (see the arrow in FIG. 3).
  • X-rays are emitted from the tube 23 continuously or in pulses.
  • the X-ray XB irradiated from the X-ray tube 23 passes through the jaw of the head H and is detected by the detector 24.
  • the electric signal output from the detector 24 is sent as frame data to the image processor of the console 15 at a constant rate.
  • the image processor performs a shift-and-add process based on the tomosynthesis method on the frame data, and reconstructs a panoramic image along a cross section in which, for example, the dentition of the jaw is curved along the dentition surface.
  • one rotation center O is set when viewed from the Z-axis direction.
  • an L-shaped teaching arm 25 is provided coaxially with the rotation shaft on the apparatus main body side of the arms 21 and 22.
  • the teaching arm 25 is used for designating a range of a part (target tooth) of a dentition that the dentist wants to examine particularly precisely. In other words, it has a position designation function that is performed in so-called partial photographing or precision photographing, which is performed in the photographing by the conventional intraoral photographing method.
  • a laser beam can be irradiated from the tip of the teaching arm 25.
  • the dentist visually confirms the position where the laser beam hits the dentition while holding the tip of the teaching arm 25 and manually rotating the arm around the jaw.
  • the teaching arm 25 is provided with an encoder and a switch (not shown). For this reason, when the angle position and the angle of the transmitted X-ray are determined, the dentist can store the setting information by pressing the switch. This stored information is used by the control unit of the console 15 at the time of actual imaging, and the X-ray irradiation operation and the rotation operation of the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 are controlled according to the information.
  • the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C is responsible for defining the upper surface and the left and right side surfaces of the imaging space S and shielding X-rays as shown in FIG.
  • the scattered radiation shielding cover 14 ⁇ / b> C has a shape obtained by bending a plate having an X-ray shielding function with a constant width into a generally inverted U shape.
  • the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C has a flat upper surface portion (ceiling body) 14U and both side surface portions (wall bodies) 14L and 14R that are curved and integrally formed from the upper surface portion 14U.
  • the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C has an X-ray shielding function as a whole, the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C is formed by combining two kinds of members relating to light transmittance. Specifically, the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C includes a translucent portion 14TR having translucency and a non-translucent portion having non-translucency integrally coupled to the translucent portion 14TR. 14NT. Both the translucent portion 14TR and the non-translucent portion 14NT partially cover the upper surface portion 14U and the side surface portions 14L and 14R.
  • the non-translucent portion 14NT is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the side so as to cover a part of the rear surface side and extend to the bottom surface side across the upper surface portion 14U and both side surface portions 14L, 14R. ing.
  • This non-translucent portion 14NT is formed as a laminated body in which, for example, a lead plate having a thickness of 0.3 mm is sandwiched between resin or metal plates.
  • the translucent portion 14TR is generally formed in an inverted U shape so as to cover the front side of the non-translucent portion 14NT across the upper surface portion 14U and the side surface portions 14L, 14R.
  • the height of the left and right sides of the light-transmitting portion 14TR is shorter than that of the non-light-transmitting portion 14NT, the bottom end of the light-transmitting portion 14TR is supported by the non-light-transmitting portion 14NT. It is like that.
  • the translucent portion 14TR is formed of a transparent acrylic resin having a thickness of 8.5 mm containing a lead component, and thereby has an X-ray shielding ability of a lead equivalent of 0.3 mmPb. Therefore, the translucent portion 14TR has an X-ray shielding function, but also has light transparency.
  • the acrylic resin itself is transparent, it contains a lead component, so it actually has a yellowish color but is translucent. For this reason, as will be described later, when the head H of the patient P enters the imaging space S, the patient can see the outside of the cover. Of course, the operator can also visually observe the inside of the imaging space S.
  • an X-ray shielding device is configured by the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C and the scattered radiation shielding plate 20 on the bottom surface portion 14C.
  • the entire portion has the function of shielding the scattered radiation, while the part of the scattered radiation shielding portion 14TR has light transmittance.
  • the X-ray shielding function is given to the top surface, both side surfaces, and the bottom surface that define the imaging space S.
  • a cover portion 51 containing a fixing pin 50 is provided at the front end of the pedestal portion 12.
  • the pin 50 moves up and down in conjunction with an operation lever 52 (see FIG. 2) provided on the upper edge of the back surface part 14 via a wire mechanism (not shown).
  • a floor fixing portion 53 having a substantially triangular shape in a side view and having a hole into which the pin 50 can be inserted is fixed at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the dental treatment chair 2. .
  • the pin 50 can be pushed down by moving the apparatus main body BD and operating the operation lever 52 in a state where the tip end position thereof is aligned with the floor fixing portion 53.
  • the apparatus main body BD is positioned with respect to the dental treatment chair 2 (see FIG. 3).
  • the pin 50 is pulled up and released from the floor fixing portion 53 by operating the operation lever 52. Thereby, apparatus main body BD can be moved to another place.
  • a moving handle 54 is fixedly provided on both sides of the operation lever 52 at the upper end of the back surface portion 14B. Therefore, the operator can easily move the apparatus main body BD along with the free rotation of the caster 11 by holding the moving handle 54.
  • the position and shape of the moving handle 54 are not limited to the position and structure tightened in FIG. 2, and if the operator can manually push or move the apparatus main body BD, the number and the shape are included. Can be freely deformed.
  • the moving handle 54 may be formed as an L-shaped handle that is fixed to both corners of the upper end portion of the back surface portion 14B and has a horizontal portion and a vertical portion integrally.
  • the back surface portion 14B is provided with an irradiation switch 56 for commanding X-ray irradiation and rotation of the X-ray tube / detector via a cord 55 having a length of 2 m, for example.
  • This irradiation switch 56 is configured as a deadman switch. That is, X-ray irradiation is performed only while the push button of the irradiation switch 56 is being pressed. The switch signal of the irradiation switch 56 is sent to the console 15.
  • a portable panoramic photographing apparatus 1 having a height of about 100 to 115 cm, a width of about 80 to 95 cm, and a depth of about 75 to 90 cm is provided.
  • the imaging space S is regarded as a substantial X-ray shielding room. You can also Therefore, in this embodiment, the X-ray shielding chamber (that is, the device 1) can be easily carried to an arbitrary place by the caster 11 by grasping and pushing the moving handle 54 and can be used there. .
  • the panoramic imaging apparatus 1 includes the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22 that extend in the lateral direction from the elevator section of the elevator 14.
  • the two arms 21 and 22 are both formed in an approximately L shape, and the ends of the support portions (tube support portions and detector support portions) 21L and 22L of the arms 21 and 22 respectively.
  • the parts are superposed so as to overlap each other and are attached to the elevator 14.
  • the elevator 14 is equipped with a rotary drive mechanism 83 that can rotate the two arms 21 and 22 independently of each other, that is, at different speeds.
  • the above-described X-ray tube 23 and detector 24 are mounted on the opposing arm portions 21A and 22A on the distal ends of the two arms 21 and 22, respectively.
  • a slit (diaphragm) 84 for forming X-rays into a fan shape is disposed on the front surface of the X-ray tube 23 on the X-ray irradiation side.
  • the opening area of the slit 84 is variable, and the size of the opening area is controlled by an opening driving unit 85 such as a motor described later.
  • the rotation drive mechanism 83 and the arms 21 and 22 constitute support means for supporting the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 so that they can be driven independently of each other.
  • the X-ray tube 23 is configured as a rotary anode type X-ray tube used for an appropriate anode material such as tungsten.
  • the X-ray tube 23 has a point-like tube focus (X-ray focus) (for example, a diameter of 0.1 mm to 0.5 mm: 0.15 mm in this embodiment) FP.
  • the X-ray tube 23 irradiates X-rays in response to driving power supplied from a high voltage generator described later.
  • the X-rays irradiated from the X-ray tube 23 are narrowed by the slit 84 and formed into a fan-shaped X-ray beam.
  • the X-ray beam then passes through the jaw JW of the subject P and attenuates, and transmitted X-rays reflecting the attenuated state enter the detector 24.
  • the jaw JW of the subject P is positioned at a predetermined position in the three-dimensional imaging space S defined between the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24. For this reason, the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 face each other (face to face) with the jaw portion interposed therebetween.
  • the irradiated X-ray beam passes through the slit 84 and then passes through the jaw portion JW (dentition etc.) and is detected by the detector 24.
  • the two arms 21 and 22 are independently rotated by the rotation driving mechanism 83.
  • the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 When viewed from the Z-axis direction, that is, the front-rear direction, the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 have a circular trajectory Tx centered on a central axis CA (rotation center O) determined in advance on the system side as shown in FIG. , Td, respectively.
  • the radii Dx and Dd from the central axis CA to the circular trajectories Tx and Td are set to different values in consideration of X-ray exposure, detection accuracy, downsizing of the apparatus, mechanical interference with the patient, and the like. Yes.
  • the reason why the distance (radius Dd) from the central axis CA to the detector 24 is smaller than that (radius Dx) from the central axis CA to the X-ray tube 23 is that the position of the detector 24 is as much as possible and the jaw JW This is to reduce the attenuation of the incident intensity of X-rays.
  • the distance (radius Dx) from the central axis CA to the X-ray tube 23 is set to a value that can ensure the distance between the X-ray tube and the skin defined by the standard.
  • the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 rotate around the jaw portion along predetermined circular trajectories Tx and Td around the central axis CA. During the rotation, irradiation and detection of the X-ray beam are executed at predetermined intervals.
  • the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 are always opposed to each other (facing each other), and X-ray irradiation and detection along a plurality of predetermined desired X-ray paths with respect to the jaw JW (dentition) are performed.
  • the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 are driven independently of each other at different angular velocities.
  • the facing arm portion housing the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24.
  • the container housing portions 21A and 22A are independent from each other about the first axis (that is, the X-ray tube swing rotation central axis) AXs and the second axis (that is, the detector swing rotation central axis) AXd.
  • rotation spininning, that is, posture
  • rotational drive mechanisms 21B and 22B such as motors are provided on the arms 21 and 22, respectively (see FIG. 7).
  • the drive control of the rotation drive mechanisms 21B and 22B is executed by a controller provided in the power supply box 13 in accordance with a command from the console 15 described later.
  • the circular trajectories Tx and Td shown in FIG. 8 indicate the trajectories of the first and second axes AXs and AXd described above when viewed on the XY plane, respectively.
  • biaxial rotational degrees of freedom are given to the arms 2 and 22 that are driven to rotate independently of each other by the rotary drive mechanism 83 described above, so that the X-ray tube 23 rotates (so-called swinging rotation) and is detected.
  • Two-axis rotational freedom is given to the rotation (so-called swinging rotation) of the device 24. This gives a total of four axes of rotational freedom.
  • the detector 24 has a plurality of detection modules in which X-ray imaging elements are two-dimensionally arranged.
  • the plurality of detection modules are formed as blocks independent from each other, and are mounted on the substrate in a predetermined rectangular shape to form the entire detector 24.
  • the structure of the detector 24 and the processing of the detection signal by the sub-pixel method are known from, for example, International Publication WO 2012 / 0886648A1.
  • Each detection module is made of a semiconductor material that converts X-rays directly into electrical pulse signals. For this reason, the detector 24 is a photon counting X-ray detector of a direct conversion method using a semiconductor.
  • each detection module is 40 ⁇ 40 pixels, for example, the size of each pixel S n is 200 [mu] m ⁇ 200 [mu] m, for example.
  • This pixel size is set to a value that allows detection of incident X-rays as a collection of many photons.
  • Each pixel responds to the incidence of each photon of the X-ray and outputs an electric pulse having an amplitude corresponding to the energy of each photon. That is, each pixel can directly convert X-rays incident on the pixel into an electrical signal.
  • the detector 24 counts the incident X-ray photons for each pixel constituting the detection surface of the detector 24, and outputs the electric quantity data reflecting the counted value, for example, a high frame of 300 fps. Output at the rate. This data is also called frame data.
  • the semiconductor material of the semiconductor layer that is, the semiconductor cell
  • cadmium telluride semiconductor CdTe semiconductor
  • cadmium zinc telluride semiconductor CdZnTe semiconductor
  • silicon semiconductor Si semiconductor
  • thallium bromide T1Br
  • Mercury iodide HgI 2
  • a detector having a combination structure of a photodiode and a scintillator may be used instead of the detector using the semiconductor cell.
  • the four laser beams are used as positioning means. Specifically, a midline laser 211 provided on the upper side of the imaging space S side of the back surface portion 14B, a horizontal laser 212 provided at each predetermined position on the side surface of the opposing arm portion 22B of the detector arm 22, and an occlusal plane laser 213 and the canine laser 214 (see FIG. 7). These lasers 211 to 214 project a linear laser marker onto the head of the subject P during positioning, and their drive is controlled via the console 15.
  • the median laser 211 aligns the midline of the head H of the subject P
  • the horizontal laser 212 aligns the Frankfurt plane
  • the occlusal plane laser 213 aligns the occlusal plane
  • the canine laser 214 aligns the canines in the dentition. (See FIG. 14, (B ′)).
  • shock sensors 215 and 216 for detecting an impact are installed on the opposing arm portions 21B and 22B of the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22 as fail-safe sensors, respectively (see FIG. 7). This is because, for example, when something hits the arms 21 and 22, it senses that and stops scanning, and the output signals of the shock sensors 215 and 216 are also sent to the console 15.
  • the console 15 includes an interface (I / F) 131 that performs input and output of signals, a controller 133 that is communicably connected to the interface 131 via a bus 132, and a first storage unit 134, a data processor (CPU) 135, a display device 136, an input device 137, a calibration calculator 138, a second storage unit 139, first to fourth ROMs 140A to 140D, and a threshold value assigner 140E.
  • I / F interface
  • the controller 133 controls the driving of the panorama photographing apparatus 1 in accordance with a program given in advance to the first ROM 140A. For this control, a command value is sent to the high voltage generator 140F that supplies a high voltage to the X-ray tube 23, a command value is sent to the opening drive unit 85 to change the opening area of the slit 84, and calibration is performed. A drive command to the operation calculator 138 is also included.
  • the first storage unit 134 stores frame data and image data that are count values sent from the detector 24 via the interface 131. Further, the controller 133 receives the switch signal of the irradiation switch 56 via the interface 131, and controls scanning as will be described later.
  • the controller 133 also receives the signals of the shock sensors 215 and 216 via the interface 131, and controls the continuation / stop of the scan described later. Further, the controller 133 is connected to the positioning lasers 151 to 154 via the interface 131, and is configured to drive the lasers 151 to 154 when a positioning command is issued.
  • the data processor 135 operates based on a program given in advance to the second ROM 140B under the control of the controller 133. Further, during panoramic shooting, the data processor 135, by its operation, adds to the frame data stored in the first storage unit 134 tomosynthesis based on a known calculation method called shift add add. Implement the law. Thereby, the panoramic image of the tomographic plane with the oral cavity of the subject P is obtained.
  • the display device 136 is responsible for displaying images to be created, information indicating the operation status of the apparatus, and operator operation information provided via the input device 137.
  • the input device 137 is used by an operator to give information necessary for imaging to the apparatus.
  • the calibration calculator 138 operates under the control of the controller 133 under a program built in the third ROM 140C in advance, and is given to each energy discrimination circuit for each pixel in the data counting circuit. Calibrate digital quantity thresholds for energy discrimination.
  • the threshold value assigner 140E calls the digital amount threshold value stored in the second storage unit 139 for each pixel and for each discrimination circuit at the time of imaging, and uses the threshold value as a command value as an interface.
  • the signal is transmitted to the photon counting circuit of the detector 24 via 131.
  • the threshold value assigner 140E executes a program stored in advance in the fourth ROM 140D.
  • the controller 133, the data processor 135, the calibration calculator 138, and the threshold value assigner 140E all include a CPU (central processing unit) that operates according to a given program. These programs are stored in advance in the first to fourth ROMs 140A to 140D, respectively.
  • the structure of the imaging space S is analyzed using a phantom, and the collection channel of the detector 24 is calibrated. Is done. This calibration is executed at an appropriate timing such as before imaging or during maintenance inspection.
  • FIG. 10 shows a standard dentition TR, a trajectory SS (referred to as a standard trajectory) of projection of the horseshoe-shaped 3D reference tomographic plane of the dentition TR onto the XY plane, the position of the cervical vertebra CS, and the subject P
  • An X-ray beam path XB at each rotation angle ⁇ in the circumferential direction CR of the jaw JW is illustrated.
  • the path XB indicates a path connecting the X-ray focal point FP of the X-ray tube 23 and the center position C in the horizontal width direction (Y-axis direction) of the detection surface 24A (see FIG. 8) of the detector 24.
  • the tube focal point FP of the X-ray tube 23 is located on the line of the first axis (that is, the central axis of swinging of the X-ray tube) AXs, and the detection surface of the detector 24
  • the center position C in the lateral width direction of 24A is located on the line of the second axis (that is, the center axis of rotation rotation of the detector) AXd.
  • a speed pattern for performing two types of photographing methods can be set for the locus SS (standard orbit) of the 3D reference tomographic plane.
  • the standard imaging is an imaging method in which X-rays are irradiated so as to avoid the left and right jaw bones as much as possible with respect to the locus SS.
  • the orthogonal imaging is an imaging method in which X-rays are irradiated so that the path is always orthogonal to the locus SS.
  • trajectory SS standard trajectory
  • orthogonal shooting a plurality of types of velocity patterns for standard imaging and / or orthogonal imaging are preliminarily rotated in a partial range in the circumferential direction around the central axis CA of the X-ray tube 23 (here, partial revolution).
  • This speed pattern is obtained by taking the scan time (for example, 12 seconds) on the horizontal axis and the revolution or rotation angle on the vertical axis.
  • the revolution means that the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 rotate or rotate in the circumferential direction along each of the trajectories Tx and Td that are separated from the central axis CA by a predetermined distance.
  • “partial” refers to rotating a partial range in the entire circumferential direction, and refers to a partial angular range in the 360 rotation range.
  • FIGS. 11 and 12 illustrate a speed pattern indicating the revolution and rotation of the X-ray tube 23 and a speed pattern indicating the revolution and rotation of the detector 24 when performing standard imaging and orthogonal imaging.
  • the curves A and B in FIGS. 11 and 12 are for orthogonal imaging for adults of the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 in the range of about 220 ° when the circumferential angle ⁇ is set as shown in FIG.
  • the revolving and rotation speed patterns are shown respectively.
  • the rotation speed is increased in these portions so that the left and right jawbone portions are scanned as roughly as possible, and the speed is set so as to be dense in the dentition TR portion.
  • curves A ′ and B ′ in FIGS. 11 and 12 respectively show the revolution and rotation speed patterns of the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 for standard imaging for adults in the range of about 220 °.
  • curves A and B in FIG. 12 show partial rotations of the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24, that is, so-called swing patterns within a certain angle. As this constant angle, about ⁇ 15 ° is set. This angle is set to 0 ° when the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 face each other. As shown in FIG. 11, the swinging of the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 itself is not constant, so the X-ray path XB does not always pass through the central axis CA. There are far more X-ray paths XB with the central axis CA removed. This is to increase the degree of freedom in designing the X-ray path XB as indicated by the arrow YJ in FIG.
  • the types of speed patterns prepared in this embodiment are ⁇ Speed pattern of standard shooting for adults (speed pattern group consisting of curves A ′ and B ′ in FIG. 11 and curves A ′ and B ′ in FIG. 12), -Speed pattern for orthogonal shooting for adults (speed pattern group consisting of curves A and B in FIG. 11 and curves A and B in FIG. 12), Speed pattern for standard shooting for children (speed pattern group consisting of time-reduced curves A ′ and B ′ in FIG. 11 and time-reduced curves A ′ and B ′ in FIG. 12), ⁇ Adult orthogonal shooting speed pattern (speed pattern group consisting of time-reduced curves A and B in FIG. 11 and time-reduced curves A and B in FIG. 12), It is.
  • the velocity patterns of the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 are not necessarily those for the standard 3D reference tomographic plane as described above.
  • This may be a velocity pattern for an arbitrarily shaped 3D reference tomographic plane.
  • the shape of the projection trajectory (standard trajectory) SS on the XY plane of the 3D reference tomographic plane shown in FIG. 10 described above may be a horseshoe shape in which the vicinity of the front teeth is narrower or wider.
  • the back teeth may form a narrower or wider horseshoe shape.
  • the velocity pattern related to such a deformed shape can be prepared in advance on the system side, or can be calculated and stored in a computer at a medical site or a research site.
  • the plurality of speed patterns set with such a high degree of freedom are stored as a table in the first storage unit 134 (storage means: see FIG. 9). For this reason, the controller 133 reads out a desired speed pattern from the first storage unit 134 to the work area through interactive exchange with the operator. When the scan is started, the controller 133 controls the rotation drive mechanisms 83, 21B, and 22B shown in FIG. 9 according to the read speed pattern. As a result, X-rays irradiated from the X-ray tube 23 and incident on the detector 24 through the jaw JW of the subject P are designated by desired standard imaging or orthogonal imaging for each rotation angle ⁇ in the circumferential direction. Pass the path XB. For this reason, the detector 24 always outputs the detected frame data while maintaining a posture facing the X-ray tube 23. This frame data is reconstructed into a panoramic image by the data processor 135.
  • the apparatus 1 When using the X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus 1, first, the apparatus 1 is positioned at a predetermined position on the back side of the dental treatment chair 2 and fixed to the floor surface. At this time, the operation lever 52 described above is operated to push the pin 50 down, and the pin 50 is engaged with the floor fixing portion 53. Thereby, positioning and fixation with respect to the dental treatment chair 2 of the main body BD of the X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus 1 are achieved. This facilitates the positioning of the scan of the X-ray panorama apparatus 1 with respect to the head H of the patient P when the backrest is tilted while sitting on the dental treatment chair 2.
  • the controller 133 of the console 15 is activated and interactively executes the following processing.
  • the controller 133 displays a login screen on the display 136, and thus performs login (FIG. 13, step S1).
  • the controller 133 causes the display 136 to display a panoramic shooting GUI (graphical user interface) (not shown).
  • the dentist inputs patient information (imaging date, patient ID, patient name, etc.) from the patient information input screen provided by this GUI (step S2).
  • a shooting type is selected on the GUI screen of the display 136 (step S3).
  • one of the four types of shooting which is set by default, is standard shooting for adults, orthogonal shooting for adults, standard shooting for children, and orthogonal shooting for children. Selected.
  • an imaging method having a customized size trajectory is set, it may be selected.
  • the controller 133 reads a speed pattern for executing the selected imaging method from the table in the first storage unit 134 to the work area. For example, when standard shooting for adults is selected, four types of pattern data of speed patterns A ′ and B ′ illustrated in FIGS. 11 and 12 are read out.
  • shooting conditions are set (step S4).
  • This setting is to set the tube voltage and tube current.
  • the controller 133 automatically sets the recommended shooting conditions. It is.
  • the controller 133 displays the screen so that the dentist positions the patient P, and waits during that time (step S5).
  • the dentist causes the patient P and his / her attendant to wear X-ray protective clothing, and causes the patient P to sit on the dental treatment chair 2.
  • the scattered radiation shielding cover 14 ⁇ / b> C is manually retracted to the rear side (see an imaginary line “retraction position” in FIG. 3).
  • the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22 are positioned at the respective standby positions (see FIG. 14A).
  • the backrest is tilted and the head H is introduced into the imaging space S.
  • the main body BD of the panoramic photographing apparatus 1 and the dental treatment chair 2 are fixed to each other via the floor surface. Therefore, the headrest HR (see FIG. 3) of the dental treatment chair 2 is located at the approximate center of the imaging space S.
  • the head H of the patient P is also guided to a substantially intermediate portion between the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22 waiting in the imaging space S.
  • the dentist presses the GUI laser irradiation button (not shown) of the display 136 and presses the positioning irradiation button.
  • the controller 133 rotates only the detector arm 22 and moves it to a positioning position, that is, a position directly beside the patient's head H (see FIG. 14B).
  • the controller 133 drives the midline laser 211, the horizontal laser 212, the occlusal plane laser 213, and the canine laser 214 (step S6). These four types of laser beams are projected onto the face of the patient P (see FIG. 14B ′).
  • the GUI of the display 136 instructs the dentist to position the face of the patient P (step S7).
  • the dentist adjusts the height of the elevator 14 via the controller 133 so that the linear beam BM1 from the canine laser 214 matches the canine of the patient P.
  • the position of the patient's face is finely adjusted while viewing the beams from the remaining lasers 211 to 213.
  • the position of the patient in the body axis direction is adjusted so that the linear beam BM2 from the occlusal plane laser 213 matches the occlusal plane of the patient P.
  • the midline sagittal plane of the head H is aligned with the linear beam BM3 from the midline laser 211.
  • the Frankfurt plane is aligned with the linear beam BM4 emitted from the horizontal laser 212.
  • the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C is moved to the imaging position in the forward direction (see the solid line “imaging position” in FIG. 3). As a result, as shown by the solid line in FIG. 3, the head H of the subject P is positioned in the defined imaging space S.
  • the front surface of the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C may be covered with an X-ray protective cloth containing lead after this positioning. This can be easily performed by detachably attaching a hinge or the like formed on the edge of the upper front surface of the cover 14C.
  • the setup button on the GUI is pressed (step S8).
  • the controller 133 rotates the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22 to a predetermined setup position (see FIG. 14C).
  • the dentist finally confirms this setup condition.
  • the state inside the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C such as the state of the patient P and the arm position, can be confirmed by observing through the window portion by the translucent portion 14TR.
  • the dentist performs a scan.
  • This scan is executed when the dentist holds the irradiation switch 56 and presses and keeps pressing the switch 56 from a slightly distant place (step S9).
  • the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22 revolve independently of each other along the velocity pattern according to the selected imaging type, and the opposing arm portions 21A, 22A, that is, X
  • the rotational movements of the tube 23 and the detector 24 are controlled independently of each other. That is, the collection of frame data is performed by the scan based on the 4-axis independent control described above.
  • Symbols Ks and Kd in FIG. 14D schematically show the trajectory of the movement of the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 due to the revolving motion of the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22.
  • step S10 the determination in step S10 is NO and the scan is continued as it is. However, in the case of YES determination, each drive unit is immediately instructed to stop scanning (step S11). This monitoring is the same for the shock sensor (steps S12 and S11).
  • step S13 the dentist continues to press the irradiation switch 56 and the scanning is automatically ended (step S13). That is, the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22 scan while moving within the scan range ⁇ (for example, about 220 °) commanded by the operation pattern, and automatically return to the initial retracted position when the scan is completed. (See FIG. 14D).
  • for example, about 220 °
  • the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C is retracted rearward to release the patient (step S13).
  • the frame data collected by this scan is stored in the first storage unit 134.
  • the data processor 135 reconstructs a tomographic image of the dentition TR from this frame data using a predetermined profile curve (a curve defining the amount of overlap between the frame data) for the shift & add process. be able to.
  • a predetermined profile curve a curve defining the amount of overlap between the frame data
  • the technique described in US-2012-0230467 A1 can be adopted.
  • FIGS. 15 and 16 show an example of the internal structure of the main body BD that can be mounted on the panoramic photographing apparatus 1 in place of the drive mechanism described above, and shows a state in which a cover or the like covering the outside is removed. Yes.
  • the structure is extremely simplified, and a base part BS that is positioned on the dental treatment chair 2 via the floor surface, and a tower part TW that can be height-adjusted from the base part BS,
  • the driving unit DV provided on the upper portion of the tower unit TW, and the arm unit AM which is attached to the tower unit TW at the upper position and is linked to the driving unit DV.
  • the base portion BS has the pedestal portion 12 as in the above-described embodiment, and a telescopic elevator 141 is mounted thereon.
  • the elevator 141 has the function of the elevator 14 described in the above-described embodiment.
  • the elevator 141 is configured such that the outer movable strut 142 can move up and down with respect to the inner fixed strut with a stroke of, for example, 270 mm in the height direction.
  • the elevator 141 incorporates a drive mechanism such as a DC motor and a height sensor.
  • the movable strut 142 is provided with a drive unit DV having a rotation mechanism similar to the rotation drive mechanism 83 described above.
  • the drive unit DV includes support plates 143 and 144 projecting from both side surfaces of the upper portion of the movable support column 142, and an electric motor 145 with a gear box with electromagnetic brakes disposed on the support plates 143 and 144, respectively. 146.
  • the drive unit DV includes a rotation drive mechanism 147 provided through the upper part of the movable support column 142 in the front-rear direction (Z-axis direction) orthogonal to the projecting direction of the support plates 143 and 144.
  • the end portion on the front side of the rotation drive mechanism 147 protrudes from the movable column 142, and the support portion 21L of the X-ray tube arm 21 and the support portion 22L of the detector arm 22 described above are provided on the protruding portion. It is attached coaxially.
  • an end portion on the rear surface side of the rotation drive mechanism 147 also protrudes from the movable column 142, and two speed reducers 148 and 149 are coaxially attached to the protruding portion.
  • Each of the motors 145 and 146 is a stepping motor, and includes gear boxes 145A and 146A on the output shaft side. These gear boxes 145A and 146A are linked to the speed reducers 148 and 149 via belts 150 and 151, respectively. Yes.
  • the rotation drive mechanism 147 incorporates a known shaft mechanism that transmits rotation independently from each other inside and outside by a bearing or the like. For this reason, two shafts inside and outside the shaft mechanism are linked to the support portion 21L of the X-ray tube arm 21 and the support portion 22L of the detector arm 22, respectively.
  • the rotation of the X-ray tube rotation motor 145 causes the X-ray tube arm 21 to rotate in the circumferential direction as described above, and the rotation of the detector rotation motor 146 similarly causes the detector arm 22 to move in the circumferential direction. Rotate.
  • Their rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation range can be controlled independently of each other by controlling the driving of the two motors 145 and 146 separately.
  • An electric motor 152 with a gear box for rotating the opposing arm portions 21A and 22A at the distal ends of the support portion 21L for the X-ray tube and the support portion 22L for the detector provided as the arm portion AM. , 153 are provided. These electric motors 152 and 153 are stepping motors, and their output shafts are linked to the opposing arm portions 21A and 22A on the X-ray tube side and the detector side, respectively. For this reason, the rotation movements of the electric motors 152 and 153 can control the above-described rotational motions of the opposing arm portions 21A and 22A on the X-ray tube side and the detector side, that is, the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24, independently of each other. It has become.
  • the four-axis rotation operation described above can be independently controlled by the mechanism according to this modification, and the above-described scan control can be performed.
  • the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 are always facing each other while moving independently on different circular orbits.
  • attitude control of four axes that is, partial revolution and rotation of the X-ray tube 23 and partial revolution and rotation of the detector 24
  • the apparatus can be miniaturized and the degree of freedom in designing the X-ray path is extremely high.
  • the trajectory of the X-ray path is arbitrarily determined so that a desired image can be taken.
  • the X-ray tube 23 and the detector are arranged around two identical orbits around the same central axis CA passing through one rotation center O and having different distances (diameters) from the central axis CA. 24 are rotated (revolved) independently of each other.
  • the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 are rotated (rotated or swung) around the first and second axes AXs and AXd parallel to the rotation axis CA at the respective rotation positions. it can. That is, since both the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 can rotate (attitude control), they can always maintain a state of facing each other.
  • the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 are relatively simple and can be reduced in size by rotating on their respective circular orbits.
  • the fan beam-shaped X-ray path can be drawn from various angles in the imaging space S and can be easily changed. For this reason, various focal planes can be set in the imaging space S.
  • the distance from the central axis CA to the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 is different. That is, the detector 24 can be rotated at a position as close as possible to the imaging region JW of the subject P.
  • the focal spot size (0.15 mm in this embodiment) of the X-ray tube 23 is the same, the magnification rate increases and the resolution increases as the detector 24 approaches the subject P. Detection accuracy is also improved.
  • the X-ray XB irradiated from the X-ray tube 23 is always limited to the size of the X-ray incident window WD of the detector 24.
  • the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 are driven and controlled independently by the four axes, and both are always opposed to each other via the jaw of the subject P during scanning. For this reason, the X-ray XB irradiated from the X-ray tube enters the detector 24. Therefore, the amount of scattered radiation leaking from the imaging space S is small.
  • X-rays focused in a fan beam shape having a rectangular opening rotate around the central axis CA, the amount of scattered radiation leaking in the front-rear direction of the imaging space S is further reduced.
  • a control board (not shown) on which the circuit of the console 15 shown in FIG. 9 is mounted is arranged in the space US on the upper surface of the tower unit TW.
  • the power supply box 13 that forms the base portion BS is equipped with only a converter that converts the voltage from AC 100V to DC 24V, and only a cable that sends the DC output to the control board or the electric motor is routed. For this reason, compared with the case where this control board is placed in the power supply box 13, wiring is also simplified.
  • the translucent portion 14TR formed on the cover 14C may be an appropriate rectangular translucent window 14TR ′ provided on both side surfaces as shown in FIG. 17 instead of the shape of FIG. 5 described above.
  • the translucent window 14TR ′ is formed of a resin material containing lead, and the other non-translucent portion 14NT is formed of a metallic plate material. Also by this, the effect of shielding the scattered radiation can be expected, and the entire weight can be reduced by reducing the lead-containing portion.
  • This translucent window 14TR ′ is primarily capable of observing the state of the patient by the dentist during scanning, and it is better if the discomfort of the patient who is not good at closing can be reduced.
  • the shape of the translucent window 14TR ′ is not limited to a rectangle, but may be a slit, a circle, or a triangle. Further, the translucent window 14TR ′ may be provided only on one side surface of the cover 14C. The position in the height direction of the translucent window 14TR ′ is usually set so that a dentist who performs a scanning operation in a standing position can observe the head of the patient inside through the translucent window 14TR ′.
  • the X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus has a more specific configuration of the teaching function outlined in the first embodiment.
  • this teaching function includes a standard imaging method and an orthogonal imaging method along the standard trajectory SS on the dentition TR that is the trajectory of the 3D reference tomographic plane. In addition to or can be carried out alone.
  • FIG. 13 shows the geometrical relationship when the film FM is inserted into the subject's mouth and irradiated with X-rays from the outside.
  • film FM is placed at a position where the target teeth are photographed, and is photographed in a state where it is held with a finger or the like.
  • the dentist images the X-ray irradiation angle at the time of imaging while adjusting the direction of the cone CN of the external X-ray irradiator. That is, the optimum X-ray incident angle for photographing the target tooth is confirmed in a simulated manner.
  • the SID distance between the X-ray focal point and the film
  • the panoramic imaging apparatus 1 intends to achieve this dental X-ray imaging function based on the above-described 4-axis independent control. What is needed at this time is a teaching function.
  • the precision photographing according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
  • a region 50 mm (25 mm + 25 mm) including this back tooth is the imaging range.
  • the actual captured image has a rectangular shape of about 50 ⁇ 50 mm. Therefore, the detector 24 is located outside the right cheek, and the X-ray tube 23 is located outside the left cheek on the opposite side.
  • the detector 24 has a small number of pixels in the horizontal width direction and is regarded as a substantially vertical line sensor, the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 are simulated while being along the two trajectories Tx and Td. Are translated in opposite directions.
  • Frame data output from the detector 24 during this parallel movement is synthesized by the tomosynthesis method, and a precision photographed image of about 50 ⁇ 50 mm is obtained. This partially photographed image replaces an image obtained by a conventional dental X-ray.
  • teaching of the optimum X-ray irradiation angle is performed on the target tooth in advance using the teaching arm 25 described above.
  • the dentist can set the X-ray irradiation angle at the time of imaging while simulating the X-ray irradiation angle passing through the target tooth through this teaching.
  • the illustration of the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22 is omitted.
  • the teaching arm 25 is L-shaped and has a substantially round bar shape, and its base is fixed to the rotation mechanism 170. For this reason, this teaching arm 25 can be rotated (rotated) around the face of the subject P (see arrow F1 in the figure).
  • the rotation mechanism 170 is provided with an encoder 171, detects the rotation angle of the entire teaching arm 25 (hereinafter referred to as the arm rotation angle ⁇ 1), and outputs a detection signal to the CPU of the controller 133 of the console 15. Is done.
  • the teaching arm 25 is a rod-like arm that is formed in an L shape as a whole, and includes a base side arm portion 25A and a tip side arm portion 25B.
  • the base side arm portion 25A extends to a part in the Z-axis direction, and the distal end side arm portion 25B is rotatably connected to the end portion of the arm portion.
  • the distal end side arm portion 25B extends in the Z-axis direction, and the end portion on the distal end side reaches above the jaw portion JW of the subject P.
  • the distal end portion of the base side arm portion 25A incorporates a rotation mechanism 172 that rotatably supports the distal end side arm portion 25B at the distal end portion, and an encoder 173 provided therewith. For this reason, when the front end side arm portion 25B is twisted, it can be rotated (turned) with respect to the base side arm portion 25A. This amount of rotation is also detected by the encoder 173, and the detection signal is sent to the CPU of the controller 133.
  • a small laser oscillator 181 and a push button switch 182 are provided at predetermined positions on the distal end side of the distal end side arm portion 25B.
  • the laser oscillator 181 can irradiate a laser beam LB toward the dentition TR of the subject P from the side surface on the distal end side of the arm.
  • the push button switch 182 is provided at the distal end of the distal arm portion 25B and can be pressed by a dentist. This switch signal is sent to the CPU of the controller 133.
  • the dentist can grasp the distal end side arm portion 25B of the teaching arm 25 and rotate it to irradiate the beam to a desired position of the dentition TR and confirm the position. Further, the irradiation angle of the laser beam can be changed by twisting (rotating) the distal end side arm portion 25B.
  • the incident angle of the laser beam LB that is, the irradiation angle of the actually irradiated X-ray beam XB (by changing the twist angle of the distal arm portion 25B) That is, the swing angle ⁇ 2) can be changed (see FIG. 16).
  • the laser oscillation point PT of the laser oscillator 181 is configured to be able to rotate on the same circular orbit as the X-ray focal point FP of the X-ray tube 23 described above. For this reason, the laser beam LB emitted from the laser oscillator 181 can simulate the X-ray beam XB at the time of actual imaging. For this reason, at the time of teaching, the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22 are positioned at their standby positions so as not to disturb the manual teaching operation of the dentist. This retracted position is set to a position obliquely below the head of the subject P that is outside the teaching range.
  • step S11 the controller 133 first attempts to read the output signals from both encoders 171 and 173, and determines whether or not the arm rotation angle ⁇ 1 has been input (step). S12, S13). The dentist determines the desired arm rotation angle ⁇ 1 and swing angle ⁇ 2, and presses the push button switch 182. In response to this, the controller 133 can assume that the arm rotation angles ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 have been determined (step S14, YES). If this determination is NO, since the dentist is still in a trial and error stage to determine the arm rotation angle ⁇ 1, the process returns to step S2 and waits while repeating the processes of steps S12 to S14.
  • Step 15 displays the arm rotation angle ⁇ 1 and the swing angle ⁇ 2 determined in a simulated manner on the display 136 (or a portable monitor at hand). If the dentist does not agree with the display result, the process returns to step S12, and the arm rotation angle ⁇ 1 and the swing angle ⁇ 2 are set again (NO in step S16).
  • step S16 if the angles ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 set by the dentist are agreed (step S16, YES), the speed for translation in the opposite direction of the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 based on the angles ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 A pattern is calculated as control data (step S17).
  • the calculated control data is sent to and stored in, for example, the first storage unit 134 (step S18).
  • step S17 the algorithm for calculating the speed pattern (control data) executed in step S17 will be described with reference to FIG. In the figure, it is assumed that the tooth number 3 in the tooth row TR is the target tooth.
  • the midpoint of the line connecting the X-ray tube focal point and the detector surface at the oblique line at the position of the tooth number 3 and the intersection of the oblique line and the dentition ellipse TR are calculated. Although two intersection points are obtained, the intersection point closer to the detector 24 is adopted.
  • the slanted line indicates a line of the swing angle ⁇ 2 at the arm rotation angle ⁇ 1 simulated by the laser beam. The detector 24 always moves in front of the subject.
  • the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 on the orbital circles Ts and Td during imaging trajectory control are divided into a range from the start position to the teaching position and a range from the teaching position to the end position, respectively.
  • the position is calculated for both the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24, and the above-described velocity pattern is calculated so that the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 face each other at the respective positions.
  • the speed pattern of the 4-axis independent control of the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 set in this way is output as control data.
  • the teaching device is configured with the processing of the controller 133, the first storage unit 134, the rotation mechanisms 170 and 172, the encoders 171 and 173, the laser oscillator 181 and the push button switch 182 as main parts. And integrated into the panoramic photographing apparatus 1.
  • the teaching device since the teaching device is integrated in the panoramic photographing device 1, it is advantageous in that the panoramic photographing device 1 can use the teaching control data as it is.
  • the panoramic photographing apparatus 1 When using the panoramic photographing apparatus 1 according to the present embodiment, first, the panoramic photographing apparatus 1 is positioned at a predetermined position on the back side of the dental treatment chair 2 and fixed to the floor surface. At this time, the operation lever 52 described above is operated to push the pin 50 down, and the pin 50 is engaged with the floor fixing portion 53. Thereby, positioning and fixation with respect to the dental treatment chair 2 of the main body BD of the panoramic imaging apparatus 1 are achieved.
  • the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C is retracted to the rear side (see the imaginary line “retraction position” in FIG. 3).
  • the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22 are positioned at their initial positions. Therefore, the dentist positions the head H of the patient P at a predetermined position in the imaging space S while tilting the backrest of the dental treatment chair 2. This positioning is performed by adjusting the height direction of the elevator 14 and positioning the midline, Frankfurt, and canine by three laser beams (not shown).
  • the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C is moved to the imaging position in the forward direction (see the solid line “imaging position” in FIG. 3).
  • the head H of the subject P is positioned in the defined imaging space S.
  • the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C is empty, and the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22 are retracted.
  • the above-described teaching is performed to set control data for precisely photographing a desired imaging range.
  • the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C is closed and the apparatus 1 is operated in the same manner.
  • the velocity pattern set as the control data is an attitude in which scanning is performed in a state in which the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 face each other in some specified ranges of the trajectories Tx and Td of the detector 24, respectively.
  • Control data For this reason, during scanning, X-ray irradiation is executed only in those designated ranges, and data collection in a partial designated range is executed.
  • the collected frame data is synthesized using the tomosynthesis method to obtain a precision photographed image similar to a conventional dental X-ray. Therefore, the discomfort and inconvenience of both the patient and the dentist when using the conventional dental X-ray can be solved.
  • partial X-ray imaging aiming at several teeth can be performed.
  • the center position of the imaging range is designated, and the incident direction of the X-ray beam in which the overlapping of teeth in the region is eliminated as much as possible is designated.
  • the imaging range of the dentition can be determined from a predetermined length.
  • the command values for the X-ray imaging range and the incident angle of the X-ray beam can be simulated in advance with a laser beam before actual scanning, and the command values (control data) can be set accurately. This command value is reflected in actual X-ray imaging.
  • the teaching according to the third modification is a simple method that does not necessarily require the teaching arm 25 to be used.
  • this method as shown in FIG. 10, assuming that the dentition TR of the subject P draws a standard trajectory SS, the rotation angle ⁇ in the circumferential direction of each tooth (target tooth) constituting the dentition TR is shown. The position of is fixed. Therefore, a speed pattern can be calculated and stored in advance based on the algorithm of FIG. 18 described above for each target tooth. In this case, for each of the maxillary and mandibular teeth arranged along the standard trajectory SS, the corresponding rotation angle ⁇ is determined, the direction orthogonal to the teeth is determined, for example, and the speed pattern is calculated from the angle and direction. is there.
  • a table in which the tooth number and the speed pattern are associated with each other may be stored in the first storage unit 134, for example.
  • one set of velocity patterns is composed of four velocity patterns by revolution and rotation of the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24.
  • tooth numbers, a plurality of X-ray incident angles on each tooth, and a plurality of sets of velocity patterns corresponding to each tooth and each X-ray incident angle may be prepared.
  • FIG. 25 illustrates a set of speed patterns for partial shooting for adults that are actually calculated.
  • 2 shows a speed pattern (curve B ′), a rotational speed pattern (curve A ′) of the X-ray tube 23, and a speed pattern (curve B ′ showing partial rotation) of the X-ray tube 23 of the detector 24.
  • FIG. 4B shows a set of similar speed patterns for the “left, lower jaw, and number 7” teeth.
  • the above-mentioned speed pattern data only needs to designate on the GUI screen of the display 136 the target tooth that the dentist wants to diagnose at the time of partial imaging.
  • the controller 133 reads a set of operation patterns shown in FIG. 25A from the first storage unit 134,
  • the partial imaging of the target tooth can be performed according to the procedure shown in FIG.
  • This partial imaging that is, a partial area centered on the target tooth may be scanned (partial scan), and the frame data collected thereby may be reconstructed with a predetermined profile of the shift and add amount.
  • a partial captured image similar to that of a conventional dental X-ray can be obtained.
  • a partial captured image can be obtained by designating only the target tooth, so that the labor of the dentist is reduced and the X-ray exposure is reduced.
  • the reason why such a simple partial photographing can be adopted is that the patient's dentition is often along the standard trajectory SS although there are individual differences.
  • the top surface, both side surfaces, and the bottom surface that define the imaging space S are surrounded by the above-described scattered radiation shielding cover 14C and the scattered radiation shielding plate 20 of the bottom surface portion 14C, and are subjected to X-ray shielding. ing. For this reason, X-rays leaking outside from the imaging space S during panoramic imaging or partial imaging can be reliably reduced or shielded. Thereby, even when panoramic imaging or partial imaging driven by the X-ray tube 23 is performed, the influence of X-rays on the outside of the imaging space S can be almost ignored.
  • This panoramic photographing apparatus 1 is movable. Therefore, it is possible to provide a panoramic imaging apparatus having an X-ray shielded space that should be called a “portable dental X-ray shield room”. Thereby, X-ray imaging
  • photography of a jaw part can be performed with the patient lying in the dental treatment chair on its back. Leakage to the outside from a very localized small imaging space around the jaw during the imaging can be greatly reduced.
  • the head H is put in the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C, and the translucent portion 14TR is provided in the cover 14C. For this reason, the outside can always be seen, and even patients who are not good at closing can be handled.
  • the caster 11 is provided as a moving means for moving the main body BD (excluding the console) of the apparatus 1.
  • this moving means is not limited to casters.
  • a gripping portion may be provided on the main body of the apparatus 1, and the gripping portion may be held and moved by hand.
  • you may provide the wheel which rotates electrically on the lower surface of the base part 12.
  • FIG. Any means capable of freely moving the main body BD of the apparatus 1 according to the present application to the side of the dental treatment chair 2 may be used.
  • a scattered radiation shielding plate (third shielding body) 31 made of a lead plate is fixedly arranged inside the back surface portion 14B of the elevator 14. At this time, it is convenient to make a hole in the scattered radiation shielding plate 31 so as to avoid the portion of the rotation center axis C such as a motor. This also gives the scattered radiation shielding function to most of the back side.
  • a warm X-ray protective curtain (fourth shield) 32 is also suspended from the vacant front surface (front surface) of the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C.
  • the scattered radiation shielding cover 14 ⁇ / b> C originally has little scattering of scattered radiation (the same applies to the back side), but as a further countermeasure against scattered radiation, the front is also subjected to X-ray shielding.
  • the X-ray protective curtain 32 is formed by connecting, for example, a plurality of strip-shaped portions in which lead is contained in a flexible resin and has an X-ray shielding function. A portion of the X-ray protective curtain 32 that corresponds to the neck portion of the subject is cut out in a substantially semicircular shape along the shape.
  • the X-ray shielding wall part that separates the imaging space S from the outside world is composed of all six surfaces including the front and back surfaces as schematically shown in FIG. Will cover.
  • the scattered radiation leaking out from the imaging space S at the time of imaging can be further reliably reduced, and the scattered radiation shielding function described above is further strengthened. Therefore, the influence of X-rays on the outside of the imaging space S due to imaging can be almost ignored, and the reliability of X-ray protection can be further enhanced. Of course, this is the same even when the X-ray shielding means of either FIG. 26 or FIG. 27 is adopted.
  • the X-ray protective curtain 32 may be a single plate made of a resin plate containing lead.
  • This X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus 1A includes a side handle 55 for conveyance on both sides of the apparatus in addition to the same configuration as the X-ray panoramic apparatus shown in FIG.
  • the moving handle 54 is also provided on both sides as shown in FIG.
  • a multipurpose storage rack 56 and a monitor 57 indicating the operating state of the apparatus 1A can be detachably attached to one of the two side handles 55.
  • the storage rack 56 can store a terminal such as a dentist PC for inputting patient information or the like to the apparatus 1.
  • These terminals and the monitor 57 can communicate with a control circuit (not shown) disposed inside the console 15 or the power supply box 13 by, for example, wireless communication.
  • an irradiation switch 58 for instructing X-ray irradiation and rotation of the X-ray tube / detector via a cord 58C having a length of 2 m, for example, is provided on the back surface portion 14B.
  • a positioning element having functions equivalent to those of the fixing pin 50, the cover portion 51, and the floor fixing portion 53 shown in FIG. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29, a positioning mechanism unit for stopping and positioning the position of the panoramic imaging apparatus 1A on the side of the dental treatment chair 2 at the front end of the pedestal unit 12 of the main body BD. 61 is provided.
  • the positioning mechanism 61 includes a stop pin 62 and a positioning pin 63 which will be described later.
  • the positioning pin 63 moves up and down in conjunction with an operation lever 52 (see FIG. 30) provided on the upper edge of the back surface part 14B via a wire mechanism described later.
  • a substantially triangular shape can be formed in a side view, and the abutment pin 62 can be contacted, and a positioning pin 63 can be inserted.
  • a floor fixing portion 71 having a hole is fixed. For this reason, if the apparatus main body BD is moved, the tip position thereof is aligned with the position of the floor fixing portion 71, and the operation lever 52 is operated with the stop pin 62 in contact with the floor fixing portion 71.
  • the positioning pin 63 can be pushed down.
  • the apparatus main body BD is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the dental treatment chair 2 as in the positioning state shown in FIG.
  • the operation lever 52 is operated to raise the positioning pin 63.
  • apparatus main body BD can be released from position fixing with floor fixing
  • a rear handle 54 is fixed to the upper end portion of the rear portion 14B so as to be positioned on both sides of the operation lever 52. For this reason, the operator can easily move the apparatus main body BD by freely rotating the caster 11 by pulling and pushing the two rear handles 54.
  • this apparatus main body BD is provided with a substantially inverted U-shaped side handle 55 that is fixed at one end on the bottom surface of the pedestal portion 12 and rises vertically from the side.
  • the side handle 55 is formed of a metal pipe, for example.
  • a guide pole 59 for a guideline is attached to a position on the side surface of the power supply box 13 below the back surface portion 14B while being suspended toward the floor F as shown in FIG.
  • the tip of the reference pole 59 on the floor surface side is close to the floor surface F.
  • a guideline GL made of tape, paint, or the like arranged on the floor surface F is laid on the floor surface F toward the floor fixing portion 71 described above. Therefore, when the apparatus main body BD is moved toward the floor fixing portion 71, that is, toward the dental treatment chair 2, the apparatus main body BD can be easily moved by pushing the tip of the guide pole 59 so as to follow the guideline GL. In addition, the dental treatment chair 2 can be easily accessed.
  • the stop pin 62 comes into contact with the predetermined surface of the floor fixing portion 71 and stops, the positioning pin 63 is driven by operating the operation lever 52 described above to achieve the positioning described above.
  • the X-ray shielding room (that is, the device 1A) can be easily carried to an arbitrary place by the caster 11 by grasping and pushing the back handle 54 and can be used there.
  • ⁇ Positioning mechanism> A positioning mechanism for positioning the panoramic imaging apparatus 1A with respect to the dental treatment chair 2 will be described.
  • this positioning mechanism is provided in the panoramic photographing apparatus 1A itself, but also includes a positioning floor fixing unit 71 fixed to the floor surface F.
  • the elevator 14 of the panoramic photographing apparatus 1 ⁇ / b> A has an operation lever 52 fixed to a predetermined portion on the upper edge of the back surface portion 14 ⁇ / b> B, and a lever drive for supporting and driving the operation lever 52. Part 81.
  • the operation lever 52 is provided for the operator to manually tilt and fix the position of the panoramic photographing apparatus 1A.
  • the lever driving portion 81 includes a support shaft 82 erected at the predetermined portion and a rotation shaft 183 pivotally supported by the support shaft 82. And have.
  • An operation lever 52 is fixed to the rotating shaft 183. For this reason, if the operating lever 52 is grasped and rotated, the rotating shaft 183 also rotates integrally.
  • a hole HL for inserting a hand is opened in the upper part of the operation lever 52 so as to be easily gripped, but an inflating part 52A that swells round in a side view is partially formed in the lower part thereof.
  • the inflatable portion 52A is in contact with a ball plunger 84 provided upright at the predetermined portion.
  • the ball plunger 84 is locked to the operation lever 52 at positions where the angle of the operation lever 52 is 0 ° (horizontal), 45 °, and 90 ° (vertical), and when the tilting power is applied more than a certain level, It is possible to rotate between.
  • the lever driving portion 81 has first and second links 85A and 85B provided on one end side of the rotating shaft 183.
  • One end of the first link 85A is fixed to one end of the rotating shaft 183.
  • the first link 85A swings as the rotation shaft 183 rotates.
  • One end of the second link 85B is fixed or rotatable to the other end of the first link 85A, and converts the swing motion of the first link 85A into a reciprocating motion.
  • a wire 86 is connected to the other end of the second link 85B.
  • the operation lever 52 is erected in an initial position P1 (90 ° tilt position), and an intermediate position P2 tilted forward from the position P1 (45 ° tilt position). Further, it is possible to take a three-stage operation position called a fixed position P3 (a tilt position of 0 °) tilted further forward from the position P2, and to lock each operation position with a certain resistance. On the contrary, the operation lever 52 can be returned in the order of positions P3, P2, and P1. The operator operates the operation lever 52 while resisting a certain resistance by the ball plunger 84, and when a position P1, P2, P3 is reached, a click feeling is obtained, and at that position, a certain resistance is applied. Locked.
  • the wire 86 is loosely inserted inside the sheath SF.
  • the sheath SF is fixed and piped inside the elevator 14 so as to avoid the internal mechanism and to form a linear path as much as possible. For this reason, the wire 86 moves in the directions indicated by arrows A and B in FIG.
  • the tip of the wire 86 reaches the tip on the front side of the pedestal portion 12 and reaches the inside of the pin cover 91 that is fixedly extended to the tip.
  • the pin cover 91 is fixed to the distal end portion of the pedestal portion 12, and projects from the distal end side by a certain distance in a bowl shape (see FIGS. 29 and 32).
  • the positioning mechanism 61 includes the stop pin 62 and the positioning pin 63 described above.
  • the step portion 92A of the support portion 92 is integrally provided with substantially rectangular parallelepiped protrusions 92B at both ends in the lateral direction, that is, in the X-axis direction.
  • the step portion 92A is provided with four guide holes H1, H2, H3, and H4 in a line along the lateral direction.
  • guide holes H1 and H4 at both ends are guide holes for guiding the positioning pin 63 in the vertical direction.
  • the guide holes H1 and H4 penetrate the stepped portion 92A and the protruding portion 92B in the vertical direction.
  • positioning pins 63 are held and accommodated in the guide holes H1 and H4, respectively, and can move up and down along the guide holes H1 (H4).
  • the positioning pin 63 is, for example, a metal cylindrical rod having a predetermined diameter, and has an annular protrusion 63A in the middle in the vertical direction.
  • annular protrusions HT1 and HT2 are respectively provided at the positions of the upper and lower ends of the guide hole H1 (H4) in the vertical direction. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34, the distance L1 between the projection 63A in the middle of the pin 63 and the projection HT2 at the lower end of the guide hole H1 (H4) is set as the movable range in the vertical direction of the positioning pin 63. Yes.
  • a coiled spring 93 is inserted in a space between the protrusion 63A of the positioning pin 63 and the protrusion HT1 on the upper end side of the guide hole H1 (H4).
  • the pin 63 takes the initial position Q1 indicated by the solid line in FIG.
  • This initial position Q1 is obtained by a “large” pulling force acting in the direction indicated by the arrow B described above when the operation lever 52 is at the initial position P1 (90 ° tilt position).
  • the upper end of the positioning pin 63 is flush with the upper surface of the projecting portion 92B of the support portion 92, and the lower end is almost flush with the lower surface of the stepped portion 92A. That is, the positioning pin 63 is accommodated in the guide hole H1 (H4).
  • the positioning mechanism portion 61 is a mechanism for moving the two positioning pins 63 up and down in accordance with the movement of the wire 86.
  • the tops of the two positioning pins 63 are rigidly connected to the suspension shaft 63C.
  • the suspension shaft 63 ⁇ / b> C of both the pins 63 is fixed to the lateral arm 101 that is laterally mounted in the lateral direction, that is, the X-axis direction.
  • the horizontal arm 101 is pivotally supported by two rings 102 at predetermined positions on both ends thereof. Further, the two rings 102 are supported by the two arms 103 so as to roll along the upper surface thereof.
  • the two arms 103 are rigidly connected to a single link 104, and the link 104 is rigidly connected to the rotating arm 105.
  • the rotating arm 105 is further coupled to the wire 86 described above via a connecting body 106.
  • the guide holes H1 and H4 described above are formed with a slit-like opening OP over a predetermined length from the upper end side of the guide holes H1 and H4 in order to allow the horizontal arm 101 to move in the vertical direction. (See FIG. 33).
  • the guide holes H1 and H4 is provided with three hall sensors 111A, 111B, and 111C so as to be slightly recessed from the inner surface.
  • the three hall sensors 111A to 111C are detection means for detecting the vertical movement of the positioning pin 63. Therefore, the positions of the three hall sensors 111A to 111C in the vertical direction, that is, the Y-axis direction are respectively the distances of an initial position Q1, a first-stage descending position Q2, and a second-stage descending position Q3, which will be described later. Correspondingly, the distance is set to be the same.
  • the two lower positions Q2 and Q3 other than the initial position Q1 are positions determined by the lower end of the positioning pin 63 being restricted by the bottom of the two-stage groove and hole described later of the floor fixing portion 71 by the extension of the spring 93. It is.
  • a magnet 112 is embedded in the outer peripheral surface of the positioning pin 63 so as to face the uppermost hall sensor 111A at the initial position Q1.
  • the Hall sensor 111A is positioned in the magnetic flux generated from the magnet 112, so that the Hall sensor 111A generates a voltage and outputs the voltage signal.
  • the hall sensors 111A to 111C send voltage signals to the control circuit of the power supply box 13 described above via lead wires (not shown).
  • each of the two stop pins 62 includes a fixing member 62A, and the fixing member 62A is fixed to the stepped portion 92A.
  • the heights of the lower ends of the two stopping pins 62 are kept constant.
  • the diameter of the guide hole H2 (H3) that accommodates the stop pin 62, that is, the diameter of each stop pin 62 is larger than that of the above-described guide holes H1, H4, that is, the positioning pins 63.
  • the reason is that the object body BD pushed by the operator is brought into contact with the floor fixing portion 71 and stopped before positioning, and it is necessary to have sufficient strength. It is necessary to prevent the apparatus main body BD from colliding with the dental treatment chair 2 due to inertia or the like.
  • the floor fixing portion 71 is a horizontally long member made of resin or metal, and is fixed to the floor surface F near the headrest when the backrest of the dental treatment chair 2 is tilted with screws or the like.
  • the floor fixing portion 71 is configured such that a cross section thereof in the horizontal direction, that is, the Z-axis direction here is shown in FIG.
  • a gentle slope 71A starts from the front end, and a long groove 71B dug shallowly along the longitudinal direction, that is, the X-axis direction in this case, lies at the back (see FIG. 35).
  • two positioning holes 71C that are further dug from the bottom surface are formed.
  • the interval between the two positioning holes 71C is the same as the interval between the two positioning pins 63 described above.
  • the long groove 71B follows the steep contact surface 71D with which the stop pin 62 can contact, and the contact surface 71D passes through the top portion 71E and falls to the back side, that is, the dental treatment chair 2 side and ends. .
  • the bending state of the contact surface 71D is made to match the curved shape of the distal end portion of the stop pin 62 as described above.
  • this control circuit includes a processor 120 constituted by a CPU.
  • the processor 120 turns on / off the red, yellow, and blue LEDs 121A, 121B, and 121C depending on which Hall sensor has an output signal and the detection state thereof.
  • These LEDs 121A, 121B, and 121C are installed, for example, at the upper end portion of the back surface portion 14B of the main body BD.
  • the processor 120 turns on the red LED 121A and turns off the remaining LEDs 121B and 121C.
  • the processor 120 when receiving an output signal from the second hall sensor 111B, the processor 120 turns on the yellow LED 121B and turns off the remaining LEDs 121A and 121C. Similarly, when an output signal is received from the third hall sensor 111C, the blue LED 121C is turned on and the remaining LEDs 121A and 121B are turned off.
  • the panoramic photographing apparatus 1A according to the present embodiment is configured as described above. For this reason, various effects are exhibited as described below.
  • this panoramic photographing apparatus 1A is configured to be portable, it can be easily moved by a dentist or a nurse.
  • the dentist or nurse holds the back handle 54 and pushes the apparatus 1A while keeping the guide pole 59 along the guideline GL. That's fine.
  • the tip of the guide line GL reaches the center position C in the longitudinal direction of the floor fixing portion 71 on the floor surface F (see FIG. 35). This center position C is matched with the lateral center position of the headrest when the backrest of the dental treatment chair 2 is tilted.
  • the device is further advanced while reducing the pressing speed slightly. Accordingly, the two stop pins 62 discharged from the lower surface of the positioning mechanism portion 61 by the predetermined height L2 come into contact with the contact surface 71D of the floor fixing portion 71. Since the floor fixing portion 71 is fixed to the floor surface F, the panorama photographing apparatus 1A also stops when it comes into contact with the contact surface 71D (see FIG. 32). At this time, the tips of the two positioning pins 63 are stored at the initial position Q1 (see FIG. 34), and are positioned directly above the long groove 71B of the floor fixing portion 71. At this time, since the red LED 121A is lit by the output signal of the first hall sensor 111A, it can be notified that the positioning has not been performed yet.
  • the operator tilts the operation lever 52 from the initial position P1 to the intermediate position P2.
  • the wire 86 is pushed (loosened) and the turning arm 105 is also rotated forward (see FIG. 32, arrow A), the spring 93 has excellent elastic force, and the two positioning pins 63 are moved downward. Pressed.
  • the two positioning pins 63 are dropped into the long groove 71 ⁇ / b> B of the floor fixing portion 71. That is, the lower end of the positioning pin 63 shifts from the initial position shown in FIG. 34 to the first-stage lowered position Q2.
  • the yellow LED 121B is turned on by the output signal of the second hall sensor 111B. This informs the operator that the positioning has not yet been done, but that the first stage of positioning has been completed.
  • the operator tilts the operation lever 52 from the intermediate position P2 to the fixed position P3.
  • the wire 86 is further loosened and the rotating arm 105 is further rotated forward (see arrow A in FIG. 32), and the two positioning pins 63 are further pushed downward.
  • the pins 63 are dropped into the positioning holes 71C as they are (FIG. 34). (Refer to the lower position Q3 of the second stage). In this lowered state, the positioning mechanism portion 61 is locked to the floor fixing portion 71 by the urging force of the spring 93.
  • the apparatus main body BD that is, the panorama photographing apparatus 1A is positioned by the position of the floor fixing unit 71. That is, the panoramic photographing apparatus 1A is positioned in a fixed state with respect to the dental treatment chair 2 at a predetermined position. At this time, since the output signal of the third hall sensor 111C becomes valid, the blue LED 121C is lit. Thereby, the completion of positioning is notified.
  • the tip ends of the two positioning pins 63 may be slightly displaced from the positions of the two positioning holes 71C.
  • the operator may hold the back handle 54 or the side handle 55 and slightly move the apparatus main body BD left and right. Thereby, a pin position that matches the position of the positioning hole 71C can be found. If the positions match, the operating lever 52 is already in the fixed position P2 and the urging force of the spring 93 is working, so the two positioning pins 63 automatically click into the two positioning holes 71C. Dropped and locked. That is, the positioning pin 63 changes from the first-stage lowered position Q2 to the second-stage lowered position Q3 shown in FIG. As a result, the blue LED 121C is lit and positioning is completed.
  • the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C is retracted to the rear side (see the imaginary line “retraction position” in FIG. 3).
  • the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22 are positioned at their initial positions. Therefore, the dentist (or operator) positions the head H of the patient P at a predetermined position in the imaging space S while tilting the backrest of the dental treatment chair 2. This positioning is performed by adjusting the height direction of the elevator 14 and The laser beam is applied to the midline, the Frankfurt plane, the occlusal plane and the canine.
  • the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C is moved to the imaging position in the forward direction.
  • the head H of the subject P is positioned in the defined imaging space S.
  • the dentist presses the irradiation switch 58 from a position slightly away the panoramic imaging described above is activated and data is collected. This series of photographing procedures is the same as that described in the first and second embodiments.
  • the subject P is released from the imaging space S by opening the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C (retracted position) and returning the back of the dental treatment chair 2 to the original position.
  • the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C is closed (imaging position), and the panorama imaging apparatus 1A is moved to another location.
  • the operation lever 52 may be continuously returned to the fixed position P3, the intermediate position P2, and the initial position P1.
  • the wire 86 and the rotating arm 105 are returned (see FIG. 32, arrow B), and the positioning pin 63 returns to the initial position against the elastic force of the spring 93 and takes the initial position Q1.
  • the red LED 121A is turned on.
  • the apparatus main body BD is released from the floor fixing
  • the panoramic photographing apparatus 1A can be freely moved and can be reliably and accurately positioned with respect to the dental treatment chair 2.
  • the apparatus main body BD is surely stopped first using the stop pin 62, so that the subsequent positioning can be performed easily and quickly.
  • the operator can obtain a guide function using the guide pole 59 and the guide line GL, so that the operations up to positioning are facilitated.
  • the pin state until the positioning is completed can be monitored by the LED, the operator can improve the positioning work efficiency.
  • the various functions and effects described above can be similarly obtained in the embodiment.
  • the amount of scattered radiation that leaks in the front-rear direction of the imaging space S is very small, and X-ray shielding that should be called a “portable dental X-ray shielding room” is made.
  • the patient in the imaging space can be easily checked, and even patients who are not good at closing can be handled.
  • the operator uses the guideline GL and the guide pole 59 as a guide.
  • Various embodiments of the guide function are possible.
  • a plurality of intersecting lines GLs such as “long”, “medium”, and “short” intersecting with each other can be pasted at a predetermined position of the linear guideline GL.
  • the positioning pin 63 is set to be directly above the long groove 71B of the floor fixing portion 71 when the reference pole 59 reaches just above the shortest intersection line of the intersection line GLs.
  • the apparatus main body BD can be reliably positioned on the floor fixing portion 71.
  • a transmission / reception unit 131 that transmits and receives a medium such as a laser and an ultrasonic wave in a non-contact manner with the guide line GL may be provided in a part of the positioning mechanism unit 61.
  • the distance information to the floor fixing unit 71 can be known by voice or light.
  • a small camera 132 that photographs the front may be provided on the front surface of the positioning mechanism unit 61. This captured image may be displayed on a display (not shown) provided near the operation lever. According to these means 131 and 132, it is possible to reliably detect the front floor fixing portion 71 which is difficult to see, which greatly helps in positioning.
  • the hall sensor is provided as a sensor indicating the pushing state of the positioning pin 63, but this may be another sensor.
  • a non-contact sensor such as an optical sensor may be used, or a physical contact sensor may be used.
  • the installation position of the sensor is not necessarily limited to the above-described embodiment, and may be a place where the movement of the positioning pin 63 can be detected.
  • a non-contact sensor or a contact sensor can be embedded on the floor fixing portion 71 side, the arrival of the positioning pin 63 being pushed in can be detected, and the detection signal can be sent wirelessly to the apparatus body BD. Thereby, the detection operation equivalent to embodiment mentioned above can be performed.
  • the stop pin 62 in the panoramic photographing apparatus 1A described above may be employed.
  • the positioning pin also has a stopper function, and accordingly, a deformation such as increasing the diameter of the pin or increasing the number of pins to three or more is desirable.
  • the positioning hole 71C may be provided in the floor fixing portion 71. That is, a structure in which the long groove 71B is not formed may be employed.
  • the positioning pin 63 simply moves up and down in two stages.
  • the operation position of the operation lever 52 also takes the two-stage operation position of the initial position P1 (90 ° tilt position) and the fixed position P3 (0 ° tilt position) in FIG. For this reason, when the tip of the positioning pin 63 that has been lowered in response to the tilting operation to the fixing position P3 of the operation lever 52 is aligned with the positioning hole 71C, it is directly fitted into the hole 71C and locked. Is done.
  • the tip of the positioning pin 63 stops around the upper end of the positioning hole 71C.
  • the operator can find the positioning hole 71C by holding the back handle 54 or the side handle 55 and slightly moving the apparatus main body BD left and right.
  • the positioning pin 63 is automatically lowered by the elastic force of the spring 93, and is locked as described above.
  • the opening at the upper end of the positioning hole 71C may be slightly wider and tapered so that the diameter is reduced.
  • the number of positioning pins 63 is not necessarily two, and may be three or more. Further, when the two positioning pins 63 are provided as in the above-described embodiment, the distance between the pins may be separated and positioned at both ends in the width direction of the apparatus main body BD, that is, in the X-axis direction.
  • the positioning hole 71C may be directly formed in the floor surface F without providing the floor fixing portion 71 depending on the structure of the floor surface F.
  • a removable lid may be attached to prevent dust and the like from accumulating in the positioning hole 71C when not in use.
  • the above-described floor fixing portion 71 may be detachably attachable to the floor surface F.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Medical Informatics (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Pathology (AREA)
  • Radiology & Medical Imaging (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • High Energy & Nuclear Physics (AREA)
  • Surgery (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Pulmonology (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Dentistry (AREA)
  • Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery (AREA)
  • Apparatus For Radiation Diagnosis (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention relates to an X-ray panorama imaging apparatus equipped with an X-ray tube arm and a detector arm that rotate centered on a central axis (CA) independently of each other. The X-ray tube arm is provided with a tube-housing section (21A), which houses the X-ray tube (23), and a tube support section (21L), which supports said tube-housing section so as to be rotatable around a first axis (AXs) that is parallel to the central axis. The detector arm is provided with a detector-housing section (22A), which houses the detector (24), and a detector support section (22L), which supports the detector-housing section so as to be rotatable around a second axis (Axd) that is parallel to the central axis. During scanning, the respective driving means are controlled according to mutually independent rotation speed patterns. It is possible to teach the limits of a partial imaging using a laser beam from an arm (25) that simulates actual X-ray irradiation and the results thereof are reflected in 4-axis control actions. The present invention also relates to a portable imaging apparatus provided with a mechanism for blocking X-rays from being scattered outside the imaging space or a mechanism for positioning on a dental treatment chair.

Description

X線撮影装置X-ray equipment

 本発明は、X線を用いたX線撮影装置に係り、特に、X線管と、このX線管から照射され被検者の撮影部位を透過したX線を検出する検出器とを対向して備え、そのX線管と検出器とを被検者の周りに回転させる構造を備えたX線撮影装置に関する。 The present invention relates to an X-ray imaging apparatus using X-rays, and in particular, faces an X-ray tube and a detector that detects X-rays irradiated from the X-ray tube and transmitted through an imaging region of a subject. And an X-ray imaging apparatus having a structure for rotating the X-ray tube and the detector around a subject.

 近年、トモシンセシス法に依る被検者の断層撮影法が盛んに行われるようになっている。このトモシンセシス法の原理はかなり古くから知られているが(例えば特許文献1を参照)、近年では、そのトモシンセシス法に依る画像再構成の簡便さを享受しようとする断層撮影法も提案されている(例えば特許文献2及び特許文献3を参照)。また、歯科用でその例が多数見られるようになっている(例えば特許文献4、特許文献5を参照)。 In recent years, tomography of subjects based on the tomosynthesis method has become popular. Although the principle of this tomosynthesis method has been known for a long time (see, for example, Patent Document 1), in recent years, a tomographic method has also been proposed in which it is desired to enjoy the simplicity of image reconstruction based on the tomosynthesis method. (For example, see Patent Document 2 and Patent Document 3). In addition, many examples are seen for dental use (see, for example, Patent Document 4 and Patent Document 5).

 トモシンセシス法の歯科への応用の一つとして、通常、湾曲した歯列を2次元平面状に展開したパノラマ画像を得るパノラマ撮影装置が実用化されている。このパノラマ撮影装置は、通常、被検者の口腔部の周囲にX線管と縦長の2次元配置の画素を有する検出器との対を、その回転中心が想定された歯列に沿った一定軌道を画くように、その回転中心を複雑に移動させながら回転させる機構を備える。X線管と検出器との間は一定値に保持される。上述の一定軌道は、標準の形状及びサイズと見做される歯列に沿って予め設定した基準断層面(3次元的に存在する断層面)に焦点を当てるための軌道である。この回転中に、一定間隔で、X線管から照射されたX線が被検者を透過して検出器によりデジタル量のフレームデータとして検出される。このため、基準断層面に焦点を絞ったフレームデータが一定間隔毎に収集される。このフレームデータをトモシンセシス法で再構成して、基準断層面のパノラマ画像を得る。 As one of the applications of the tomosynthesis method to dentistry, a panoramic imaging apparatus that obtains a panoramic image in which a curved dentition is developed in a two-dimensional plane has been put into practical use. This panoramic imaging apparatus normally has a pair of an X-ray tube and a detector having vertically long two-dimensionally arranged pixels around the oral cavity of a subject along a dentition whose rotation center is assumed. A mechanism for rotating the center of rotation in a complicated manner so as to draw a trajectory is provided. A constant value is maintained between the X-ray tube and the detector. The above-described constant trajectory is a trajectory for focusing on a reference tomographic plane (a tomographic plane existing three-dimensionally) set in advance along a dentition regarded as a standard shape and size. During this rotation, X-rays emitted from the X-ray tube are transmitted through the subject at regular intervals, and detected as digital frame data by the detector. For this reason, frame data focused on the reference tomographic plane is collected at regular intervals. This frame data is reconstructed by the tomosynthesis method to obtain a panoramic image of the reference tomographic plane.

 また、特許文献6には、X線管と検出器が同一中心点の周りに共に円軌道を描くように且つ互いに独立して回転可能な撮像系を持つパノラマ撮影装置の一例が開示されている。顎部はその円軌道の中に位置付けられる。X線管から照射されたX線は常に検出器の検出面に向くように、X線管及び検出器の速度パターンが制御される。 Further, Patent Document 6 discloses an example of a panoramic imaging apparatus having an imaging system in which an X-ray tube and a detector can both rotate independently of each other so as to form a circular orbit around the same center point. . The jaw is positioned in the circular orbit. The velocity pattern of the X-ray tube and the detector is controlled so that the X-ray irradiated from the X-ray tube always faces the detection surface of the detector.

特開昭57-203430JP-A-57-203430 特開平6-88790JP-A-6-88790 特開平10-295680JP-A-10-295680 米国特許公開 US2006/0203959 A1US Patent Publication US2006 / 0203959 A1 特開2007-136163JP2007-136163A 国際公開WO2012/008492International Publication WO2012 / 008492

 しかしながら、上述した特許文献6に記載の装置の場合、X線管と検出器が同一軌道上に1つの回転中心を通る対応した両位置に取り付けられているため、撮影空間(オブジェクト空間)において焦点をあてる断層面(焦点面)の設定に未だ制約があった。つまり、被検者の歯列は個人によって違うので、焦点面の設定に、より高い自由度が望まれるが、そのような要望に応えきれていなかった。 However, in the case of the apparatus described in Patent Document 6 described above, the X-ray tube and the detector are mounted at corresponding positions passing through one rotation center on the same trajectory. There were still restrictions on the setting of the tomographic plane (focal plane). In other words, since the dentition of the subject varies from person to person, a higher degree of freedom is desired for setting the focal plane, but such a request has not been met.

 さらに、所望の数歯を狙った部分的な焦点面の設定により高い自由度が望まれるが、そのような要望にも応えきれていなかった。 Furthermore, a high degree of freedom is desired by setting a partial focal plane aiming at a desired number of teeth, but such a request has not been met.

 医療の現場では、長年積み上げてきた経験や手法を踏襲した施術法は、術者にとって受け入れ易い。加えて、その施術法に立脚した上で、X線被ばく量が少なく且つ有用なデータが得られれば、それは非常に喜ばしいことである。このことは歯科の分野においても同じである。歯科の分野には、そのような施術の一つに、口内法X線撮影(Intraoral radiography)がある。これは口腔内の歯列上の撮影したい歯の部分に指や器具で固定したX線フィルムにX線を照射し、X線像を得るものである。3~4歯の範囲の精密な画像が得られる反面、口腔内にフィルムを入れるため、患者の苦痛は小さくない。 In the medical field, treatment methods that follow the experience and techniques accumulated over many years are easy for the surgeon to accept. In addition, it is very delightful if useful data can be obtained with a low X-ray exposure based on the treatment method. The same is true in the dental field. In the field of dentistry, one of such treatments is intraoral radiography. In this method, an X-ray image is obtained by irradiating an X-ray film fixed to a portion of a tooth to be photographed on a dentition in the oral cavity with a finger or an instrument. While a precise image in the range of 3-4 teeth can be obtained, since the film is placed in the oral cavity, the patient's pain is not small.

 この撮影をより精密に行うには、上述した各種引例に記載の装置の場合、到底、困難であった。理由は、ビーム状のX線を所望の角度で目的歯に入射させ、その透過X線を正確に受けるための、X線管及び検出器の位置及び姿勢制御が困難であるためである。 In order to perform this photographing more precisely, it was difficult in the case of the devices described in the various references mentioned above. The reason is that it is difficult to control the position and posture of the X-ray tube and the detector in order to make the beam-shaped X-ray incident on the target tooth at a desired angle and accurately receive the transmitted X-ray.

 本発明は、上記事情に鑑みてなされたもので、撮影空間における焦点面の設定、即ちX線パスの軌道の設定の自由度を上げることができる、X線被ばくの少ないX線撮影装置を提供することを、その主な目的とする。加えて、撮影空間における部分的な焦点面の設定やX線パスの設定の自由度を上げ、且つ、的確に所望の精密撮影範囲をティーチングする機能を備えた、X線被ばくの少ないX線撮影装置を提供することを、別の目的とする。さらに加えて、搬送し易く且つ位置決めが容易で、撮影空間における焦点面の設定の自由度を上げることができる、X線被ばくの少ないX線撮影装置を提供することを、別の目的とする。 The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides an X-ray imaging apparatus with low X-ray exposure that can increase the degree of freedom in setting a focal plane in an imaging space, that is, setting an X-ray path trajectory. Its main purpose is to do. In addition, X-ray imaging with low X-ray exposure, with the ability to increase the degree of freedom of setting a partial focal plane and X-ray path in the imaging space, and accurately teaching the desired precision imaging range Another object is to provide a device. In addition, another object is to provide an X-ray imaging apparatus with low X-ray exposure that is easy to convey and easy to position, and can increase the degree of freedom in setting a focal plane in the imaging space.

 上記主な目的を達成するため、本開示の1つの態様に係るX線撮影装置は、点状の焦点を有し、この焦点から広がりを持ったX線を照射するX線管と、このX線管から照射される前記X線を検出して当該X線の量に対応したデータを出力する検出器と、を備え、前記X線管と前記検出器を予め定めた所定の回転中心を通る中心軸の周りに回動可能に構成される。この装置は、前記X線管がX線の照射するように前記X線管を収容した管収容部と、この管収容部を前記中心軸に平行な第1の軸の周りに回動可能に支持する管支持部とを備えたX線管アームと、前記管収容部を前記管支持部に対して前記第1の軸の周りに回動させる第1の駆動手段と、前記X線を入射させるように前記検出器を収容した検出器収容部と、この検出器収容部を前記中心軸に平行な第2の軸の周りに回動可能に支持する検出器支持部とを備えた検出器アームと、前記検出器収容部を前記検出器支持部に対して前記第2の軸の周りに回動させる第2の駆動手段と、前記X線管アーム及び前記検出器アームを互いに独立して同軸で駆動可能に支持するともに、当該両アームを駆動して前記中心軸の周りを回動させる第3の駆動手段と、前記X線管アーム、前記検出器アーム、前記管収容部、及び前記検出器収容部を前記X線によるスキャンのために互いに独立して回動させる速度パターンに応じて前記第1、第2、及び第3の駆動手段を制御する制御手段と、を備えている。 In order to achieve the main object described above, an X-ray imaging apparatus according to one aspect of the present disclosure has an X-ray tube having a point-like focal point and irradiating X-rays having a spread from the focal point, A detector that detects the X-rays emitted from the X-ray tube and outputs data corresponding to the amount of the X-rays, and passes the X-ray tube and the detector through a predetermined center of rotation. It is configured to be rotatable around a central axis. The apparatus is configured such that the X-ray tube receives the X-ray so that the X-ray tube is accommodated, and the tube accommodating portion is rotatable around a first axis parallel to the central axis. An X-ray tube arm having a tube support portion to support, a first driving means for rotating the tube housing portion around the first axis with respect to the tube support portion, and the X-ray incident thereon A detector including a detector accommodating portion that accommodates the detector and a detector supporting portion that rotatably supports the detector accommodating portion around a second axis parallel to the central axis. An arm, second driving means for rotating the detector accommodating portion around the second axis with respect to the detector support portion, and the X-ray tube arm and the detector arm independently of each other. Third driving means that supports the same axis so as to be drivable and drives both arms to rotate around the central axis. The first and second in accordance with a speed pattern in which the X-ray tube arm, the detector arm, the tube housing portion, and the detector housing portion are rotated independently of each other for scanning by the X-ray. And control means for controlling the third drive means.

 特に、好適には、前記中心軸から前記第1の軸までの第1の距離は、前記中心軸から前記第2の軸までの第2の距離よりも大きい値に設定され、前記X線管と前記検出器は互いに異なる円軌道上に沿って回転可能である。 Particularly preferably, the first distance from the central axis to the first axis is set to a value larger than the second distance from the central axis to the second axis, and the X-ray tube And the detector can be rotated along different circular orbits.

 この構成によれば、1つの回転中心を通る同一の中心軸の周りに、X線管と検出器を互いに独立して回動させる。その上で、X線管及び検出器がそれぞれの回転位置において、上記回転軸に平行な第1及び第2の軸の周りに回動させることができる。つまり、X線管及び検出器は共にそれぞれが自転(姿勢制御)可能であるので、両者は常に対向した状態を維持できる。これにより、X線管及び検出器がそれぞれの円軌道上を回転するという比較的簡単で小型化が可能な構成でありながら、スキャン中には、X線管から検出器に向かうファンビーム状のX線のパスを容易に変更でき、従って、撮影空間に多様な角度から描かせることができる。このため、撮影空間に多様な焦点面を設定することができる。 According to this configuration, the X-ray tube and the detector are rotated independently of each other around the same central axis passing through one rotation center. In addition, the X-ray tube and the detector can be rotated around first and second axes parallel to the rotational axis at their respective rotational positions. That is, since both the X-ray tube and the detector can rotate (attitude control), the two can always be kept facing each other. As a result, while the X-ray tube and the detector rotate on their respective circular orbits, the configuration is relatively simple and can be miniaturized. The X-ray path can be easily changed, so that the imaging space can be drawn from various angles. For this reason, various focal planes can be set in the imaging space.

 さらに、好適には、前記X線の実際の照射を模擬したレーザビームを、前記管収容部と前記検出器収容部との間の撮影空間に位置する被検体の撮影部位に照射して当該撮影部位の部分的な撮影範囲を撮影前に指示可能なティーチング手段と、このティーチング手段により指示された前記部分的な撮影範囲を解読し、その解読結果に応じた前記速度パターンを設定する設定手段と、
を備える。
Further preferably, the imaging is performed by irradiating the imaging part of the subject located in the imaging space between the tube housing part and the detector housing part with a laser beam simulating the actual irradiation of the X-ray. Teaching means capable of instructing a partial imaging range of a part before imaging; setting means for decoding the partial imaging range instructed by the teaching means and setting the speed pattern according to the decoding result; ,
Is provided.

 この別の態様に係る構成によれば、撮影空間における部分的な焦点面の設定やX線パスの設定の自由度を上げ、且つ、的確に所望の精密撮影範囲をティーチングする機能を備えたX線撮影装置を提供することができる。 According to the configuration according to this other aspect, an X having a function of increasing the degree of freedom in setting a partial focal plane in an imaging space and setting an X-ray path and teaching a desired precision imaging range accurately. A line imaging apparatus can be provided.

 さらに、好適には、前記X線管アーム及び前記検出器アームを回動可能に保持し、且つ前記X線管アーム及び前記検出器アームが前記特定部位の周りを回転することを許容する撮影空間を提供する昇降機と、この昇降機を搭載した台座部と、
 前記撮影空間を画成するように位置し、且つ前記X線を遮蔽する遮蔽材料で形成された遮蔽体と、とを備える。
Further, preferably, the imaging space that holds the X-ray tube arm and the detector arm rotatably and allows the X-ray tube arm and the detector arm to rotate around the specific part. An elevator for providing the pedestal, and a pedestal portion equipped with the elevator,
And a shielding body that is located so as to define the imaging space and is formed of a shielding material that shields the X-ray.

 さらに別の好適な例は、前記X線撮影装置は、歯科用治療椅子の後ろまで移動して当該歯科用治療椅子の後部側に位置付け、当該歯科用治療椅子に仰向けに横たわった被検者の頭部を前記X線管と前記検出器と間の撮影空間に位置決めしてX線撮影を行う装置であって、操作者が操作する操作部と、この操作部に与えられた操作を伝える伝達手段と、前記椅子に対する当該X線撮影装置の横付けるときの所定位置を指定する位置指定手段と、前記伝達手段が伝えた前記操作に応じて前記位置指定手段に係止して当該X線撮影装置を前記所定位置に固定する固定手段と、を備えることである。 In another preferred example, the X-ray imaging apparatus moves to the back of the dental treatment chair, is positioned on the rear side of the dental treatment chair, and lies on the back of the dental treatment chair. An apparatus for performing X-ray imaging by positioning a head in an imaging space between the X-ray tube and the detector, an operation unit operated by an operator, and transmission for transmitting an operation given to the operation unit Means, a position specifying means for specifying a predetermined position when the X-ray imaging apparatus is laid on the chair, and the X-ray imaging by being locked to the position specifying means according to the operation transmitted by the transmitting means. Fixing means for fixing the device in the predetermined position.

 添付図面において、
図1は、本発明の第1の実施形態に係るX線撮影装置としてのX線パノラマ撮影装置の正面側を示す斜視図である。 図2は、第1の実施形態に係るX線撮影装置としてのX線パノラマ撮影装置の背面を示す斜視図である。 図3は、X線パノラマ撮影装置と歯科用治療椅子との位置関係及び撮影時の被検者の位置を説明する斜視図である。 図4は、底面部の内蔵させた散乱線遮蔽板を説明する部分断面図である。 図5は、散乱線遮蔽カバーを説明する斜視図である。 図6は、上面及び両側面を覆う散乱線遮蔽カバーと底面部を覆う散乱線遮蔽板とによる4面の遮蔽構造を説明する図である。 図7は、X線パノラマ撮影装置の4軸独立駆動を説明する側面図である。 図8は、X線パノラマ撮影装置の4軸独立駆動を説明する正面図である。 図9は、X線パノラマ撮影装置の電気的な構成の一部を示すブロック図である。 図10は、標準的な歯列、3D基準断層面、及びX線パスの関係を説明する図である。 図11は、4軸独立制御のうちの2軸に係るX線管、検出器の部分的な公転を指示する速度パターンを例示するグラフである。 図12は、4軸独立制御のうちの残りの2軸に係るX線管、検出器の部分的な公転を指示する速度パターンを例示するグラフである。 図13は、パノラマ撮影の作業の手順を説明するフローチャートである。 図14は、パノラマ撮影時のX線管及び検出器の代表的な回転位置とレーザビームによる位置決めの様子とを説明する図である。 図15は、第1の変形例に係るX線パノラマ撮影装置に搭載される装置本体の内部構造を前方からみた斜視図である。 図15は、その第1の変形例に係る装置本体の内部構造を後方から見た斜視図である。 図17は、第2の変形例に係る散乱線遮蔽カバーを説明する斜視図である。 本発明の第2に実施形態に係るX線パノラマ撮影装置を説明するために用いた、従来のデンタルレントゲンを説明する図である。 図19は、第2の実施形態で採用するティーチングを説明する図である。 図20は、第2の実施形態に係るティーチング装置に該当する構成を説明する図である。 図21は、ティーチングを説明する図である。 図22は、ティーチングの処理を説明する図である。 図23は、ティーチングにおいて制御データの演算を説明する図である。 図24は、部分撮影の作業の手順を説明するフローチャートである。 図25は、標準軌道に沿って歯列があると仮定したときの、部分撮影に係る目的歯の速度パターンを例示するグラフである。 図26は、本発明の第3の実施形態に係るX線パノラマ撮影装置の背面部に設けた散乱線遮蔽板の位置を説明する側面図である。 図27は、第3の実施形態で使用可能な、撮影時に前面側に着脱自在に配置するX線防護カーテンの取り付けを説明する図である。 図28は、図26及び図27の両方に示す散乱線遮蔽手段を採用したときの6面の遮蔽構造を説明する図である。 図29は、本発明の第4の実施形態に係るX線パノラマ撮影装置とフロア固定部と示す側面図である。 図30は、第4の実施形態に係るX線パノラマ撮影装置とフロア固定部とを示す斜視図である。 図31は操作レバーの正面図及び側面図である。 図32は、操作レバーから位置決めピンまでのリンク機構の概要及びその動作を、その位置決めピンの位置決め動作と伴に説明する、図32中のIX-IX線に沿った概略図である。 図33は、図32のI-I線及びII-II線に沿った断面構造の概要を説明する図である 図34は、位置決めピンの構造と上下動の動作を説明する図である。 図35は、フロア固定部の斜視図である。 図36は、フロア固定部の長手方向に直交する方向に沿った断面図である。 図37は、位置決めピンの上下動を検知するためのセンサ、LED、及びプロセッサの繋がりを示すブロック図である。 図38は、位置決めのためのフロア固定部の位置検出手段の変形例を説明する図である。 図39は、位置決めのためのフロア固定部の位置検出手段の別の変形例を説明する図である。
In the accompanying drawings,
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a front side of an X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus as an X-ray imaging apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the back of the X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus as the X-ray imaging apparatus according to the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a perspective view for explaining the positional relationship between the X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus and the dental treatment chair and the position of the subject at the time of imaging. FIG. 4 is a partial cross-sectional view illustrating a scattered radiation shielding plate built in the bottom surface. FIG. 5 is a perspective view for explaining the scattered radiation shielding cover. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a four-surface shielding structure including a scattered radiation shielding cover that covers the upper surface and both side surfaces and a scattered radiation shielding plate that covers the bottom surface portion. FIG. 7 is a side view for explaining the 4-axis independent drive of the X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus. FIG. 8 is a front view for explaining the 4-axis independent drive of the X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing a part of the electrical configuration of the X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between a standard dentition, a 3D reference tomographic plane, and an X-ray path. FIG. 11 is a graph illustrating a speed pattern instructing partial revolutions of the X-ray tube and the detector related to two axes in the four-axis independent control. FIG. 12 is a graph illustrating a speed pattern instructing partial revolutions of the X-ray tube and the detector relating to the remaining two axes of the four-axis independent control. FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure for panoramic shooting. FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining a typical rotational position of the X-ray tube and the detector during panoramic imaging and a state of positioning by a laser beam. FIG. 15 is a perspective view of the internal structure of the apparatus main body mounted on the X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus according to the first modification as seen from the front. FIG. 15 is a perspective view of the internal structure of the apparatus main body according to the first modification when viewed from the rear. FIG. 17 is a perspective view illustrating a scattered radiation shielding cover according to the second modification. It is a figure explaining the conventional dental X-ray used in order to explain the X-ray panoramic imaging device concerning the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining teaching employed in the second embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a configuration corresponding to the teaching device according to the second embodiment. FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining teaching. FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining teaching processing. FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining calculation of control data in teaching. FIG. 24 is a flowchart for explaining the procedure of the partial shooting operation. FIG. 25 is a graph illustrating a speed pattern of a target tooth related to partial imaging when it is assumed that there is a dentition along a standard trajectory. FIG. 26 is a side view for explaining the position of the scattered radiation shielding plate provided on the back surface of the X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus according to the third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining the attachment of an X-ray protective curtain that can be used in the third embodiment and that is detachably disposed on the front side during imaging. FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating a six-side shielding structure when the scattered radiation shielding means shown in both FIG. 26 and FIG. 27 is employed. FIG. 29 is a side view showing an X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus and a floor fixing unit according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing an X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus and a floor fixing unit according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 31 is a front view and a side view of the operation lever. FIG. 32 is a schematic view taken along the line IX-IX in FIG. 32 for explaining the outline and operation of the link mechanism from the operation lever to the positioning pin together with the positioning operation of the positioning pin. FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a cross-sectional structure taken along lines II and II-II in FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining the structure of the positioning pin and the vertical movement operation. FIG. 35 is a perspective view of the floor fixing portion. FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional view along a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the floor fixing portion. FIG. 37 is a block diagram showing the connection of sensors, LEDs, and processors for detecting the vertical movement of the positioning pins. FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the position detection means of the floor fixing portion for positioning. FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining another modified example of the position detecting means of the floor fixing portion for positioning.

 以下、添付図面を参照して、本発明の実施形態を説明する。 Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings.

 [第1の実施形態]
 図1~図14を参照して、本発明に係るX線撮影装置としてのX線パノラマ撮影装置の1つの実施形態を説明する。
[First embodiment]
An embodiment of an X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus as an X-ray imaging apparatus according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

 このパノラマ撮影装置1は、被検者の顎部(歯列を含む)のパノラマ画像を撮像する歯科用の診断装置として構成されている。
なお、このパノラマ撮影装置1には、この装置1で精密撮影を行うときに、同装置1自身にその精密撮影を行うX線照射の角度及び範囲を教示し、その教示した角度及び範囲を反映した制御データを設定するティーチング装置を機能的に一体に備えている。
The panoramic imaging apparatus 1 is configured as a dental diagnostic apparatus that captures a panoramic image of a subject's jaw (including a dentition).
The panoramic imaging apparatus 1 teaches the apparatus 1 itself the angle and range of X-ray irradiation for performing the precision imaging, and reflects the taught angle and range. The teaching device for setting the control data is functionally integrated.

 このパノラマ撮影装置1によれば、被検者の顎部の擬似的な3次元断層像(画像それ自体は2次元画像であるが、歯列などの撮影部位の形状に応じて3次元的に表示される断面像)を撮影できる。また、この装置1によれば、顎部の歯列のうちの部分的な領域をより精密に撮影する精密撮影を行うこともできる。
この精密撮影のための回転動作の制御は、本パノラマ撮影装置1の場合、「4軸独立制御」と呼ばれる独自の制御法をベースにしている。また、この「4軸独立制御」は、装置が可搬可能であって歯科用治療椅子2のサイドで使用可能であるために独自の散乱線防止構造を採用している。このため、まず散乱線防止構造を含む装置全体の構成を説明し、それに続いて4軸独立制御の構成を説明したうえで、精密撮影のためのティーチング装置の構成を説明する。
According to this panoramic imaging apparatus 1, a pseudo three-dimensional tomographic image of the subject's jaw (the image itself is a two-dimensional image, but three-dimensionally according to the shape of an imaging region such as a dentition). The displayed cross-sectional image) can be taken. Moreover, according to this apparatus 1, the precision imaging | photography which image | photographs the partial area | region of the dentition of a jaw part more precisely can also be performed.
In the case of this panoramic photographing apparatus 1, the control of the rotational operation for precision photographing is based on an original control method called “4-axis independent control”. The “4-axis independent control” employs a unique anti-scattering structure because the apparatus is portable and can be used on the side of the dental treatment chair 2. For this reason, first, the configuration of the entire apparatus including the scattered radiation prevention structure will be described, followed by the description of the configuration of the 4-axis independent control, and then the configuration of the teaching device for precision imaging.

 なお、本実施形態では、本発明に係るX線撮影装置はパノラマ撮影装置として構成されているが、このX線撮影装置は、必ずしも歯科の分野に限られない。このX線撮影装置は、例えば、耳鼻咽喉撮影、手足の骨・関節部分など、他の様々な部位を撮影するように構成してもよい。さらに、このX線撮影装置はX線CT装置として実施してもよい。 In this embodiment, the X-ray imaging apparatus according to the present invention is configured as a panoramic imaging apparatus, but the X-ray imaging apparatus is not necessarily limited to the dental field. This X-ray imaging apparatus may be configured to image various other parts such as otolaryngology imaging and bone / joint parts of limbs. Furthermore, this X-ray imaging apparatus may be implemented as an X-ray CT apparatus.

 図1及び図2に、本実施形態に係る歯科用のX線パノラマ撮影装置1の外観を前面側から、また背面側から示す。また、図3に、このパノラマ撮影装置1を歯科用治療椅子2のサイドに位置決めして使用する状態を示している。 FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 show the appearance of the dental X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus 1 according to this embodiment from the front side and from the back side. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the panoramic photographing apparatus 1 is used while being positioned on the side of the dental treatment chair 2.

 このパノラマ撮影装置1は、図1及び図2から分かるように、4個のキャスタ11(移動手段)を装着した台座部12と、この台座部12に搭載された電源ボックス13と、台座部12に搭載され且つ上下方向に昇降可能な昇降機14と、制御及び画像処理を担うコンピュータを搭載したコンソール15とを備える。コンソール15は、ケーブルを介して又は無線通信を介して、装置1の本体BDに接続されている。なお、ここでは、本体BDとは、コンソール15及び後述するフロア固定部53(図3参照)を除いた装置部分を言う。
[装置の機構的な全体構成の概要]
 最初に、このパノラマ撮影装置1の機構的な全体構成の概要を説明する。
As can be seen from FIGS. 1 and 2, the panoramic photographing apparatus 1 includes a pedestal portion 12 on which four casters 11 (moving means) are mounted, a power supply box 13 mounted on the pedestal portion 12, and a pedestal portion 12. And a console 15 equipped with a computer for controlling and image processing. The console 15 is connected to the main body BD of the apparatus 1 via a cable or via wireless communication. Here, the main body BD means an apparatus portion excluding the console 15 and a floor fixing portion 53 (see FIG. 3) described later.
[Overview of overall system configuration]
First, an outline of the overall mechanical configuration of the panorama photographing apparatus 1 will be described.

 キャスタ11は、台座部12の下面の四隅に設けられている。このため、歯科医又はオペレータは、このパノラマ撮影装置1を押して移動可能であり、部屋から部屋へ、又は、部屋の置き場と歯科用治療椅子2のサイドとの間で自由に移動させることができる。このキャスタ11は、ペダル11P(図2参照)を踏んだり上げたりするこことで、ロック及びアンロックできるようになっている。 The casters 11 are provided at the four corners of the lower surface of the base 12. For this reason, the dentist or the operator can move by pushing the panoramic imaging apparatus 1 and can freely move from room to room or between the room place and the side of the dental treatment chair 2. . The caster 11 can be locked and unlocked by depressing or raising a pedal 11P (see FIG. 2).

 昇降機14は、その内部に昇降機構(図示せず)を備え、台座部12(つまり床面、つまり歯科用治療椅子2)に対して電動で所定の高さ範囲(例えば10~15cm)の任意高さの位置に上下動可能に構成されている。電源ボックス13はシステムの各部に必要な電力を供給する電源回路を備える。昇降機14は、その内側に、図3に示すように患者Pの頭部Hを位置させてX線スキャンを実施するための略直方体状の撮影空間Sを提供している。 The elevator 14 includes an elevating mechanism (not shown) in its interior, and is electrically driven with respect to the pedestal portion 12 (that is, the floor surface, that is, the dental treatment chair 2) in an arbitrary range of height (eg, 10 to 15 cm). It is configured to be movable up and down at a height position. The power supply box 13 includes a power supply circuit that supplies necessary power to each part of the system. The elevator 14 provides an imaging space S having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape for performing X-ray scanning with the head H of the patient P positioned as shown in FIG.

 この昇降機14の上下動方向をY軸とすると、図示のようなXYZ直交座標を設定できる。X線撮影のときには患者Pの頭部Hを撮影空間(オブジェクト空間)Sに図3に示すように位置させるので、Z軸の方向をその頭部Hの頭頂部から足先に向かう方向(正中線の方向)に一致させる。このため、Z軸の方向は体軸方向とも一致する。さらに、このZ軸の方向は、この装置1の前後の方向でもあるので、前後方向とも呼ぶことができる。本実施形態では、パノラマ撮影装置1の撮影空間Sに被検者Pの頭部Hを入れる側を前面(正面)と呼び、その反対側の面を後面(背面)と呼ぶ。 XYZ orthogonal coordinates as shown in the figure can be set if the vertical movement direction of the elevator 14 is the Y axis. Since the head H of the patient P is positioned in the imaging space (object space) S as shown in FIG. 3 at the time of X-ray imaging, the direction of the Z axis is the direction from the top of the head H toward the toes (median) Line direction). For this reason, the direction of the Z axis coincides with the body axis direction. Furthermore, since the direction of the Z axis is also the front-rear direction of the device 1, it can also be called the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the side where the head H of the subject P is put into the imaging space S of the panoramic imaging apparatus 1 is referred to as the front surface (front surface), and the opposite surface is referred to as the rear surface (back surface).

 昇降機14は、その下側に位置する底面部14Aと、この底面部14Aの前記X軸方向における背面の側にて当該底面部14Aに当接して位置する背面部14Bとを備える。また、昇降機14はさらに、底面部14Aの横方向、即ちX軸方向の両サイドに一部オーバーラップして重なり且つ前後方向に手動でスライド可能な散乱線遮蔽カバー(遮蔽体の一部を成す)14Cを備える。この散乱線遮蔽カバー14Cは、底面部14Aの横方向の両外側が設けられたレールRLにより支持され且つ前後方向にスライド可能に係合している。このスライドを手動で行うために、散乱線遮蔽カバー14Cの上側で且つ後ろ側には取手16が取り付けられている。 The elevator 14 includes a bottom surface portion 14A located on the lower side thereof and a back surface portion 14B located on the bottom surface portion 14A in contact with the bottom surface portion 14A on the back surface side in the X-axis direction. Further, the elevator 14 further includes a scattered radiation shielding cover (part of the shielding body) which overlaps and overlaps both sides of the bottom surface portion 14A, that is, both sides in the X-axis direction and can be manually slid in the front-rear direction. ) 14C. The scattered radiation shielding cover 14C is supported by rails RL provided on both lateral sides of the bottom surface portion 14A, and is slidably engaged in the front-rear direction. In order to perform this slide manually, a handle 16 is attached to the upper side and the rear side of the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C.

 この散乱線遮蔽カバー14Cは、後述するが、X線の散乱線を遮蔽する第1の遮蔽体の機能を担っている。 As will be described later, the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C serves as a first shielding body that shields scattered radiation of X-rays.

 底面部14Aは、矩形状の樹脂製又は金属性の板材を折り返し且つその両端を接合して一定高さを持ち高さ方向、即ちY軸の方向の外側に向けて湾曲させた部材で構成される。この湾曲部材の内部は空洞になっている。この湾曲の理由は、撮影空間Sをなるべく広く確保し、かつデザイン性を考慮したためである。 The bottom surface portion 14A is formed of a member formed by folding a rectangular resin or metal plate and joining both ends thereof to have a certain height and bend toward the outside in the height direction, that is, the Y-axis direction. The The inside of this bending member is hollow. The reason for this curvature is that the imaging space S is secured as wide as possible and the design is taken into consideration.

 この底面部14Aの内部の空洞の上側には、図4に示すように、鉛板からなる散乱線遮蔽板(第2の遮蔽体)20が貼られている。この散乱線遮蔽板20の横方向(X軸方向)の縁は、底面部14Aの高さ方向(Y軸方向)への折り返しに沿って、一部、折り返されている。この鉛板の厚さは0.3mmを有し、X線の散乱線を遮蔽する第2の遮蔽体の機能を担っている。 As shown in FIG. 4, a scattered radiation shielding plate (second shielding member) 20 made of a lead plate is attached to the upper side of the cavity inside the bottom surface portion 14A. A part of the edge in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) of the scattered radiation shielding plate 20 is folded along the folding of the bottom surface portion 14A in the height direction (Y-axis direction). The lead plate has a thickness of 0.3 mm and functions as a second shielding body that shields scattered X-ray rays.

 昇降機14の背面部14Bの内部には、モータ、動力伝達機構等を含む駆動系と、この駆動系の動作をモニタするエンコーダ(回転位置センサ)とを含む機構部分が内蔵されている。この機構部分として、2つの互いに独立して回転可能な電動モータに結合された2つのアーム21、22が背面部14Bから撮影空間Sに突設されている。これらのアーム21、22は、ファン状のX線を照射するX線管23を先端側に内蔵したL字状のX線管アーム21と、X線を検出する検出器24を先端側に内蔵したL字状の検出器アーム22である。両アーム21、22それぞれの他端は回転中心Oを中心に同軸状にリンクし且つ互いに独立して回転できるように(図1中の矢印T、D参照)、図示しない2つモータの回転軸に各別に結合されている。モータは例えばステッピングモータであり、図示しないエンコーダによりその回転位置が検出される。なお、上記回転中心Oを通るZ軸に平行な仮想的な直線を中心軸CAと呼ぶことにする。この中心軸CAは、アームの回転中心軸とも呼べる軸であり、物理的には、アームの回転中心Oとは異なるものであるが、Z軸方向に沿って観察する時には同一の位置に存在する。 A mechanism part including a drive system including a motor, a power transmission mechanism, and the like and an encoder (rotational position sensor) for monitoring the operation of the drive system is built in the back surface portion 14B of the elevator 14. As this mechanism portion, two arms 21 and 22 coupled to two electric motors that can rotate independently of each other project from the back surface portion 14B into the imaging space S. These arms 21 and 22 have an L-shaped X-ray tube arm 21 with an X-ray tube 23 for irradiating fan-shaped X-rays at the tip side and a detector 24 for detecting X-rays at the tip side. L-shaped detector arm 22. The other ends of the arms 21 and 22 are coaxially linked around the rotation center O and can rotate independently of each other (see arrows T and D in FIG. 1). Are combined separately. The motor is, for example, a stepping motor, and its rotational position is detected by an encoder (not shown). Note that a virtual straight line passing through the rotation center O and parallel to the Z axis is referred to as a central axis CA. The central axis CA is an axis that can also be called the rotation center axis of the arm, and is physically different from the rotation center O of the arm, but is present at the same position when observing along the Z-axis direction. .

 さらに、X線管アーム21及び検出器アーム22は、それぞれ、その先端側の部分、即ち、X線管23、検出器24を内蔵した部分のみを、その支持側、即ち、背面部14Bに支持された支持部側に対して所定角度範囲内で独立して回転可能になっている。図1中の矢印T1、D1は、この回転を示している。つまり、X線管23及び検出器24は、背面部14Bに対して、全部で4軸の独立回転の自由度を持っている。 Further, each of the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22 supports only the tip side portion, that is, the portion containing the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 on the support side, that is, the back surface portion 14B. The support portion can be independently rotated within a predetermined angle range with respect to the support portion side. Arrows T1 and D1 in FIG. 1 indicate this rotation. That is, the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 have a total of four degrees of freedom of independent rotation with respect to the back surface portion 14B.

 X線管23には図示しないコリメータが内蔵されている。このコリメータは、X線管23が照射したX線を検出器24のX線入射窓WDの形状に合わせてコリメートする。X線入射窓WDは細長い2次元の開口を呈している。このため、X線管23から照射されるX線は、X線入射窓WDの大きさに合わせた、断面が矩形状のファンビームXBに絞られている。 The X-ray tube 23 incorporates a collimator (not shown). This collimator collimates the X-rays irradiated by the X-ray tube 23 according to the shape of the X-ray incident window WD of the detector 24. The X-ray incident window WD has an elongated two-dimensional opening. For this reason, the X-rays irradiated from the X-ray tube 23 are narrowed down to a fan beam XB having a rectangular cross section in accordance with the size of the X-ray incident window WD.

 検出器24は、後述するが、本実施形態では、X線を直接に電気信号に変換する半導体素子を2次元の画素に配列したモジュールを複数個の縦列配置した構造を有する。 As will be described later, the detector 24 has a structure in which a plurality of modules in which semiconductor elements that directly convert X-rays into electrical signals are arranged in two-dimensional pixels are arranged in a plurality of columns.

 撮影時には、撮影空間Sには後述するように、被検者Pの頭部Hが位置する。このとき、X線管23と検出器24が顎部を挟んで互いにほぼ対向して位置する。装置が起動すると、X線管23と検出器24とが互いに独立して頭部Hの周りを例えば220°の角度範囲に渡り回転し(図3の矢印参照)、その回転中に、X線管23からX線が連続的に又はパルス状に照射される。このため、X線管23から照射されたX線XBは頭部Hの顎部を透過して検出器24により検出される。この検出器24から出力される電気信号は、フレームデータとして、一定レートでコンソール15の画像プロセッサに送られる。画像プロセッサは、それらのフレームデータにトモシンセシス法に基づくシフト&アッドの処理を施し、例えば顎部の歯列をその歯列面に沿って湾曲する断面に沿ったパノラマ画像を再構成する。 At the time of imaging, the head H of the subject P is located in the imaging space S as will be described later. At this time, the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 are positioned substantially opposite to each other across the jaw. When the apparatus is activated, the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 rotate independently of each other over the head H over an angle range of, for example, 220 ° (see the arrow in FIG. 3). X-rays are emitted from the tube 23 continuously or in pulses. For this reason, the X-ray XB irradiated from the X-ray tube 23 passes through the jaw of the head H and is detected by the detector 24. The electric signal output from the detector 24 is sent as frame data to the image processor of the console 15 at a constant rate. The image processor performs a shift-and-add process based on the tomosynthesis method on the frame data, and reconstructs a panoramic image along a cross section in which, for example, the dentition of the jaw is curved along the dentition surface.

 図1、図3に示すように、撮影空間Sには、Z軸方向から見た場合、1つの回転中心Oが設定されている。この回転中心Oの位置において、上記両アーム21、22の装置本体側の回転軸と同軸にL字状のティーチングアーム25が設けられている。このティーチングアーム25は、歯科医が特に精密に診たい歯列の一部(目的歯)の範囲を指定するために使用される。つまり、所謂、部分撮影又は精密撮影と呼ばれる、従来の口内撮影法による撮影において実施する位置指定機能を持っている。ティーチングアーム25の先端部からレーザビームを照射できるようになっている。このため、歯科医は、ティーチングアーム25の先端を保持して同アームを顎部の周りに手動で回転させながら、レーザビームが歯列に当たる位置を目視で確認する。この目視による確認作業を通して、実際にX線撮影を行ったときの、円周方向における目的歯の角度位置及び目的歯を透過するX線の角度を事前に模擬的に検証できる。ティーチングアーム25には図示しないエンコーダとスイッチが設けられている。このため、その角度位置及び透過X線の角度が決まると、歯科医はそのスイッチを押すことで、上記設定情報を記憶させることができる。この記憶情報は、実際の撮影のときに、コンソール15の制御部により使用され、その情報にしたがってX線管23及び検出器24のX線照射動作及び回転動作が制御される。 As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, in the imaging space S, one rotation center O is set when viewed from the Z-axis direction. At the position of the rotation center O, an L-shaped teaching arm 25 is provided coaxially with the rotation shaft on the apparatus main body side of the arms 21 and 22. The teaching arm 25 is used for designating a range of a part (target tooth) of a dentition that the dentist wants to examine particularly precisely. In other words, it has a position designation function that is performed in so-called partial photographing or precision photographing, which is performed in the photographing by the conventional intraoral photographing method. A laser beam can be irradiated from the tip of the teaching arm 25. Therefore, the dentist visually confirms the position where the laser beam hits the dentition while holding the tip of the teaching arm 25 and manually rotating the arm around the jaw. Through this visual confirmation work, the angle position of the target tooth in the circumferential direction and the angle of the X-ray that passes through the target tooth when X-ray imaging is actually performed can be verified in advance. The teaching arm 25 is provided with an encoder and a switch (not shown). For this reason, when the angle position and the angle of the transmitted X-ray are determined, the dentist can store the setting information by pressing the switch. This stored information is used by the control unit of the console 15 at the time of actual imaging, and the X-ray irradiation operation and the rotation operation of the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 are controlled according to the information.

 勿論、本実施形態においては、この部分撮影(精密撮影)を実施しない構成を採ることもできる。つまり、その場合には、ティーチングアーム25、これを駆動する機構、及び、部分撮影のためのソフトウェアが不要になるので、その分、構成も簡素化でき、また演算量も少なくすることができる。 Of course, in the present embodiment, a configuration in which this partial photographing (precision photographing) is not performed can be adopted. That is, in that case, the teaching arm 25, a mechanism for driving the teaching arm, and software for partial photographing are not required, so that the configuration can be simplified and the calculation amount can be reduced accordingly.

 一方、散乱線遮蔽カバー14Cは、図5に示すように、撮影空間Sの上面及び左右の側面の画成及びX線遮蔽を担う。このため、散乱線遮蔽カバー14Cは、その全体形状としては、一定幅のX線遮蔽機能を持つ板体を大略、逆U字状に曲げた形状を持つ。つまり、散乱線遮蔽カバー14Cは、平坦な上面部(天井体)14Uと、この上面部14Uから湾曲して一体に形成された両方の側面部(壁体)14L、14Rとを有する。 On the other hand, the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C is responsible for defining the upper surface and the left and right side surfaces of the imaging space S and shielding X-rays as shown in FIG. For this reason, the scattered radiation shielding cover 14 </ b> C has a shape obtained by bending a plate having an X-ray shielding function with a constant width into a generally inverted U shape. In other words, the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C has a flat upper surface portion (ceiling body) 14U and both side surface portions (wall bodies) 14L and 14R that are curved and integrally formed from the upper surface portion 14U.

 さらに、この散乱線遮蔽カバー14Cは、その全体はX線遮蔽機能を持つものの、光透過性に関する2種類の部材を結合して形成されている。具体的には、この散乱線遮蔽カバー14Cは、透光性を持たせた透光体部分14TRと、この透光体部分14TRと一体に結合された非透光性を持つ非透光体部分14NTとから成る。この透光体部分14TR及び非透光体部分14NTは共に、上面部14U及び両側面部14L、14Rを互いに部分的にカバーしている。 Furthermore, although the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C has an X-ray shielding function as a whole, the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C is formed by combining two kinds of members relating to light transmittance. Specifically, the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C includes a translucent portion 14TR having translucency and a non-translucent portion having non-translucency integrally coupled to the translucent portion 14TR. 14NT. Both the translucent portion 14TR and the non-translucent portion 14NT partially cover the upper surface portion 14U and the side surface portions 14L and 14R.

 非透光体部分14NTは、上面部14U及び両側面部14L、14Rに跨って、その後面側の一部を担い且つ底面側に延びるように側面方向から見たときに逆L字状に形成されている。この非透光体部分14NTは、例えば厚さ0.3mmの鉛板を樹脂製又は金属性の板でサンドイッチ状に挟んだ積層体として形成されている。 The non-translucent portion 14NT is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the side so as to cover a part of the rear surface side and extend to the bottom surface side across the upper surface portion 14U and both side surface portions 14L, 14R. ing. This non-translucent portion 14NT is formed as a laminated body in which, for example, a lead plate having a thickness of 0.3 mm is sandwiched between resin or metal plates.

 一方、透光体部分14TRは、上面部14U及び両側面部14L、14Rに跨って、非透光体部分14NTの前面側をカバーするように、大略、逆U字状に形成されている。特に、この透光体部分14TRの左右両側の高さは、非透光体部分14NTのそれより短いため、透光体部分14TRの底面側の端部は非透光体部分14NTに支持されるようになっている。 On the other hand, the translucent portion 14TR is generally formed in an inverted U shape so as to cover the front side of the non-translucent portion 14NT across the upper surface portion 14U and the side surface portions 14L, 14R. In particular, since the height of the left and right sides of the light-transmitting portion 14TR is shorter than that of the non-light-transmitting portion 14NT, the bottom end of the light-transmitting portion 14TR is supported by the non-light-transmitting portion 14NT. It is like that.

 本実施形態では、この透光体部分14TRは、鉛成分を含む厚さ8.5mmの透明アクリル樹脂で形成されており、これにより鉛当量0.3mmPbのX線遮蔽能力を持たせている。したがって、透光体部分14TRはX線遮蔽機能を有する一方で、光透過性をも有する。アクリル樹脂自体は透明であるが、鉛成分を含んでいるため、実際には黄色みがかった色をしているが、透光性がある。このため、後述するように、撮影空間Sに患者Pの頭部Hが入ったときに、患者はカバー外側を見ることができる。勿論、オペレータも撮影空間Sの内部の様子を目視することができる。 In the present embodiment, the translucent portion 14TR is formed of a transparent acrylic resin having a thickness of 8.5 mm containing a lead component, and thereby has an X-ray shielding ability of a lead equivalent of 0.3 mmPb. Therefore, the translucent portion 14TR has an X-ray shielding function, but also has light transparency. Although the acrylic resin itself is transparent, it contains a lead component, so it actually has a yellowish color but is translucent. For this reason, as will be described later, when the head H of the patient P enters the imaging space S, the patient can see the outside of the cover. Of course, the operator can also visually observe the inside of the imaging space S.

 透光体部分14TRを成す鉛入りアクリル樹脂の端部は、非透光体部分14NTの端部に差し込まれている。このため、このアクリル樹脂と非透光体部分14NTにサンドイッチされている鉛板とが相互に隙間無く連結している。したがって、透光体部分14TR及び非透光体部分14NTの双方で、即ち、散乱線遮蔽カバー14Cにより撮影空間Sの上面及び両側のX線遮蔽機能が確保される。本実施形態では、散乱線遮蔽カバー14C及び底面部14Cの散乱線遮蔽板20によりX線遮蔽装置が構成されている。 The end portion of the lead-containing acrylic resin forming the light transmitting portion 14TR is inserted into the end portion of the non-light transmitting portion 14NT. For this reason, this acrylic resin and the lead plate sandwiched by the non-translucent portion 14NT are connected to each other without a gap. Therefore, the X-ray shielding function on the upper surface and both sides of the imaging space S is ensured in both the translucent portion 14TR and the non-translucent portion 14NT, that is, the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C. In the present embodiment, an X-ray shielding device is configured by the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C and the scattered radiation shielding plate 20 on the bottom surface portion 14C.

 この散乱線遮蔽カバー14Cの見方を変えると、その全体で散乱線を遮蔽する機能を持つ一方で、その一部の部分、つまり、透光体部分14TRが光透過性を持つ、とも言える。 If the view of the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C is changed, it can be said that the entire portion has the function of shielding the scattered radiation, while the part of the scattered radiation shielding portion 14TR has light transmittance.

 この結果、図6に示すように、撮影空間Sを画成する上面、両側面、及び、底面の4面にX線遮蔽機能が与えられたことになる。 As a result, as shown in FIG. 6, the X-ray shielding function is given to the top surface, both side surfaces, and the bottom surface that define the imaging space S.

 なお、台座部12の正面側先端には、図1、3に示すように、固定用のピン50を内蔵したカバー部51が設けられている。このピン50は、図示しないワイヤー機構を介して、背面部14の上側の縁に設けた操作レバー52(図2参照)に連動して上下動するようになっている。一方で、歯科用治療椅子2の後面側の床面所定位置には、側面視で略三角形を成し且つ上記ピン50を挿入可能な穴を穿設したフロア固定部53が固設されている。このため、装置本体BDを移動させて、その先端位置を上記フロア固定部53に合わせた状態で、操作レバー52を操作すれば、ピン50を押し下げることができる。このピン50がフロア固定部53の穴に入ることで、装置本体BDは歯科用治療椅子2に対して位置決めされる(図3参照)。 Note that, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, a cover portion 51 containing a fixing pin 50 is provided at the front end of the pedestal portion 12. The pin 50 moves up and down in conjunction with an operation lever 52 (see FIG. 2) provided on the upper edge of the back surface part 14 via a wire mechanism (not shown). On the other hand, a floor fixing portion 53 having a substantially triangular shape in a side view and having a hole into which the pin 50 can be inserted is fixed at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the dental treatment chair 2. . For this reason, the pin 50 can be pushed down by moving the apparatus main body BD and operating the operation lever 52 in a state where the tip end position thereof is aligned with the floor fixing portion 53. When the pin 50 enters the hole of the floor fixing portion 53, the apparatus main body BD is positioned with respect to the dental treatment chair 2 (see FIG. 3).

 さらに、装置本体BDを別の場所に移動するときにも、操作レバー52を操作することで、ピン50を引き上げ、フロア固定部53から解除される。これにより、装置本体BDを別の場所へ移動させることができる。 Furthermore, when the apparatus main body BD is moved to another location, the pin 50 is pulled up and released from the floor fixing portion 53 by operating the operation lever 52. Thereby, apparatus main body BD can be moved to another place.

 この装置本体BDを移動させるために、その背面部14Bの上端部に、操作レバー52の両サイドに移動用ハンドル54が固設されている。このため、オペレータはこの移動用ハンドル54を持って、装置本体BDをキャスタ11の自在回転と共に、楽に移動させることができる。なお、この移動用ハンドル54の位置や形状は、図2に締めした位置及び構造に限定されるものではなく、オペレータが手動で装置本体BDを押したり移動させたりことができれば、その数も含めて、自在に変形可能である。例えば、移動用ハンドル54は、背面部14Bの上端部の両角部にそれぞれ固設され、かつ水平部分と垂直部分とを一体に持つL字状のハンドルとして形成してもよい。 In order to move the apparatus main body BD, a moving handle 54 is fixedly provided on both sides of the operation lever 52 at the upper end of the back surface portion 14B. Therefore, the operator can easily move the apparatus main body BD along with the free rotation of the caster 11 by holding the moving handle 54. The position and shape of the moving handle 54 are not limited to the position and structure tightened in FIG. 2, and if the operator can manually push or move the apparatus main body BD, the number and the shape are included. Can be freely deformed. For example, the moving handle 54 may be formed as an L-shaped handle that is fixed to both corners of the upper end portion of the back surface portion 14B and has a horizontal portion and a vertical portion integrally.

 なお、この背面部14Bには、例えば2mの長さのコード55を介してX線照射及びX線管・検出器の回転を指令する照射スイッチ56が設けられている。この照射スイッチ56はデッドマンスイッチとして構成されている。つまり、この照射スイッチ56の押しボタンを押している間だけX線照射が行われるようになっている。この照射スイッチ56のスイッチ信号はコンソール15に送られる。 The back surface portion 14B is provided with an irradiation switch 56 for commanding X-ray irradiation and rotation of the X-ray tube / detector via a cord 55 having a length of 2 m, for example. This irradiation switch 56 is configured as a deadman switch. That is, X-ray irradiation is performed only while the push button of the irradiation switch 56 is being pressed. The switch signal of the irradiation switch 56 is sent to the console 15.

 以上の構成のもとに、高さが100~115cm程度、横幅が80~95cm程度、さらに、奥行が75~90cm程度の可搬型のパノラマ撮影装置1が提供されている。しかも、その撮影空間Sを画成する上面、両側面、及び、底面の4面にはX線遮蔽機能が与えられているため、この撮影空間Sを実質的なX線遮蔽室と見做すこともできる。これ故、本実施形態では、移動用ハンドル54を掴んで押すことで、X線遮蔽室(つまり、この装置1)をキャスタ11で任意の場所まで簡単に運んで、そこで使用可能になっている。 Based on the above configuration, a portable panoramic photographing apparatus 1 having a height of about 100 to 115 cm, a width of about 80 to 95 cm, and a depth of about 75 to 90 cm is provided. In addition, since the X-ray shielding function is given to the four surfaces of the upper surface, both side surfaces, and the bottom surface that define the imaging space S, the imaging space S is regarded as a substantial X-ray shielding room. You can also Therefore, in this embodiment, the X-ray shielding chamber (that is, the device 1) can be easily carried to an arbitrary place by the caster 11 by grasping and pushing the moving handle 54 and can be used there. .

 [撮影系の4軸独立駆動の構成及び制御]
 ここで、図7~図12を参照して、X線管23及び検出器24を備えた撮影系の4軸独立駆動のための構成及び制御を更に説明する。
[Configuration and control of 4-axis independent drive of imaging system]
Here, with reference to FIGS. 7 to 12, the configuration and control for the 4-axis independent drive of the imaging system including the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 will be further described.

 このパノラマ撮影装置1は、前述したように、昇降機14の昇降部から横方向に伸びたX線管アーム21及び検出器アーム22を備える。この2つのアーム21、22は、図7に示すように、共に、略L字状に形成され、それらアーム21、22夫々の支持部(管支持部、検出器支持部)21L、22Lの端部が互いに重なるように重合され、昇降機14に取り付けられている。昇降機14の内部には、それら2つのアーム21、22を互いに独立して、すなわち互いに異なる速度で回転させることができる回転駆動機構83が装備されている。上記2つのアーム21、22の夫々の先端側の対向アーム部分21A、22Aには、前述したX線管23及び検出器24がそれぞれ装備されている。X線管23のX線照射側の前面には、X線をファン状に成形するスリット(絞り)84が配設される。このスリット84の開口の面積は可変になっており、この開口面積の大きさが後述するモータなどの開口駆動部85によって制御される。回転駆動機構83と両アーム21、22により、X線管23及び検出器24に対する、相互に独立して駆動可能に支持する支持手段が構成される。 As described above, the panoramic imaging apparatus 1 includes the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22 that extend in the lateral direction from the elevator section of the elevator 14. As shown in FIG. 7, the two arms 21 and 22 are both formed in an approximately L shape, and the ends of the support portions (tube support portions and detector support portions) 21L and 22L of the arms 21 and 22 respectively. The parts are superposed so as to overlap each other and are attached to the elevator 14. The elevator 14 is equipped with a rotary drive mechanism 83 that can rotate the two arms 21 and 22 independently of each other, that is, at different speeds. The above-described X-ray tube 23 and detector 24 are mounted on the opposing arm portions 21A and 22A on the distal ends of the two arms 21 and 22, respectively. On the front surface of the X-ray tube 23 on the X-ray irradiation side, a slit (diaphragm) 84 for forming X-rays into a fan shape is disposed. The opening area of the slit 84 is variable, and the size of the opening area is controlled by an opening driving unit 85 such as a motor described later. The rotation drive mechanism 83 and the arms 21 and 22 constitute support means for supporting the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 so that they can be driven independently of each other.

 X線管23はタングステン等の適宜な陽極材に用いた回転陽極型X線管として構成される。X線管23は点状の管焦点(X線焦点)(例えば径が0.1mm~0.5mm:本実施形態では0.15mm)FPを有する。このX線管23は、後述する高電圧発生装置から供給される駆動電力に応答してX線を照射する。X線管23から照射されたX線は、スリット84で絞られてファン状のX線ビームに成形される。このX線ビームは、その後、被検者Pの顎部JWを透過して減衰し、その減衰状態を反映した透過X線が検出器24に入射する。 The X-ray tube 23 is configured as a rotary anode type X-ray tube used for an appropriate anode material such as tungsten. The X-ray tube 23 has a point-like tube focus (X-ray focus) (for example, a diameter of 0.1 mm to 0.5 mm: 0.15 mm in this embodiment) FP. The X-ray tube 23 irradiates X-rays in response to driving power supplied from a high voltage generator described later. The X-rays irradiated from the X-ray tube 23 are narrowed by the slit 84 and formed into a fan-shaped X-ray beam. The X-ray beam then passes through the jaw JW of the subject P and attenuates, and transmitted X-rays reflecting the attenuated state enter the detector 24.

 撮影時には、図8に示すように、X線管23と検出器24との間に画成される3次元の撮影空間Sの所定位置に被検者Pの顎部JWが位置決めされる。このため、X線管23と検出器24は顎部を挟んで互いに対向(正対)する。照射されたX線ビームはスリット84を通った後、顎部JW(歯列など)を透過し、検出器24により検出される。撮影時には回転駆動機構83により2つのアーム21、22が独立に回転駆動される。 During imaging, as shown in FIG. 8, the jaw JW of the subject P is positioned at a predetermined position in the three-dimensional imaging space S defined between the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24. For this reason, the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 face each other (face to face) with the jaw portion interposed therebetween. The irradiated X-ray beam passes through the slit 84 and then passes through the jaw portion JW (dentition etc.) and is detected by the detector 24. At the time of photographing, the two arms 21 and 22 are independently rotated by the rotation driving mechanism 83.

 Z軸方向、即ち前後方向からみた場合、X線管23及び検出器24は、図8に示すように、予めシステム側で定めた中心軸CA(回転中心O)を中心とする円形の軌道Tx、Tdに沿ってそれぞれ回転駆動される。この中心軸CAから円形軌道Tx、Tdまでの半径Dx、DdはX線被ばく、検出精度、装置の小形化、患者との機械的な干渉などを考慮して、互いに異なった値に設定されている。本実施形態では、Dx≠Ddであって、特にDx>Ddに設定されている。中心軸CAから検出器24までの距離(半径Dd)の方が、中心軸CAからX線管23までのそれ(半径Dx)よりも小さい理由は、検出器24の位置を極力、顎部JWに接近させ、X線の入射強度の減弱を少なくするためである。中心軸CAからX線管23までの距離(半径Dx)は、規格で定められたX線管・皮膚間距離を確保できる値に設定されている。これにより、中心軸CAを中心にX線管23と検出器24は顎部の周りを各々、所定の円形軌道Tx、Tdに沿って回転する。その回転中に所定間隔でX線ビームの照射及び検出が実行される。 When viewed from the Z-axis direction, that is, the front-rear direction, the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 have a circular trajectory Tx centered on a central axis CA (rotation center O) determined in advance on the system side as shown in FIG. , Td, respectively. The radii Dx and Dd from the central axis CA to the circular trajectories Tx and Td are set to different values in consideration of X-ray exposure, detection accuracy, downsizing of the apparatus, mechanical interference with the patient, and the like. Yes. In the present embodiment, Dx ≠ Dd, and particularly Dx> Dd. The reason why the distance (radius Dd) from the central axis CA to the detector 24 is smaller than that (radius Dx) from the central axis CA to the X-ray tube 23 is that the position of the detector 24 is as much as possible and the jaw JW This is to reduce the attenuation of the incident intensity of X-rays. The distance (radius Dx) from the central axis CA to the X-ray tube 23 is set to a value that can ensure the distance between the X-ray tube and the skin defined by the standard. As a result, the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 rotate around the jaw portion along predetermined circular trajectories Tx and Td around the central axis CA. During the rotation, irradiation and detection of the X-ray beam are executed at predetermined intervals.

 このため、X線管23及び検出器24を常に互いに対向(正対)させ、且つ、顎部JW(歯列)に対する予め定めた複数の所望のX線パスに沿ったX線の照射及び検出を実行させるため、X線管23及び検出器24は互いに異なる角速度で且つ互いに独立して駆動される。 Therefore, the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 are always opposed to each other (facing each other), and X-ray irradiation and detection along a plurality of predetermined desired X-ray paths with respect to the jaw JW (dentition) are performed. In order to perform the above, the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 are driven independently of each other at different angular velocities.

 なお、上述した「互いに対向」とは、図8に示すように、Z軸方向に沿って見た場合、X線管23の点状の管焦点(焦点位置)FPから照射されてスリット84によりコーン状に成形されたX線ビームの照射範囲と、検出器24のX線検出面24Aとが一致している状態を言う。特に、そのX線ビームのXY面に沿った方向の中心線Tが、そのX線検出面の幅方向(XY面に沿った方向の幅)の検出中心位置Cに90°で交差する状態を「正対している状態」と呼ぶ(図8参照)。なお、図8において、機械的な回転中心OからX軸方向に伸びる直線位置を回転角θ=0とし、この回転位置から時計方向及び反時計方向に±の回転方向が設定されている。 Note that “opposing each other” described above is irradiated from the dotted tube focal point (focal position) FP of the X-ray tube 23 when viewed along the Z-axis direction, as shown in FIG. This refers to a state in which the irradiation range of the X-ray beam formed in a cone shape matches the X-ray detection surface 24A of the detector 24. In particular, the center line T in the direction along the XY plane of the X-ray beam intersects the detection center position C in the width direction of the X-ray detection surface (the width in the direction along the XY plane) at 90 °. This is referred to as a “facing state” (see FIG. 8). In FIG. 8, a linear position extending in the X-axis direction from the mechanical rotation center O is defined as a rotation angle θ = 0, and ± rotation directions are set clockwise and counterclockwise from this rotation position.

 このため、上述した「常に互いに対向(又は正対)」を実現するため、前記アーム21、22のうち、X線管23、検出器24を収容している対向アーム部分(管収容部、検出器収容部)21A、22Aは、第1の軸(即ち、X線管の首振り回転中心軸)AXs、第2の軸(即ち、検出器の首振り回転中心軸)AXdを中心にそれぞれ独立して回動(自転、すなわち姿勢)可能になっている(図7、8参照)。そのためのモータ等の回転駆動機構21B、22Bがアーム21、22にそれぞれ装備されている(図7参照)。この回転駆動機構21B、22Bの駆動制御は後述するコンソール15からの指令に応じて電源ボックス13に備えたコントローラにより実行される。 For this reason, in order to realize the above-mentioned “always facing each other (or facing each other)”, among the arms 21 and 22, the facing arm portion (tube housing portion, detection) housing the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24. The container housing portions 21A and 22A are independent from each other about the first axis (that is, the X-ray tube swing rotation central axis) AXs and the second axis (that is, the detector swing rotation central axis) AXd. Thus, rotation (spinning, that is, posture) is possible (see FIGS. 7 and 8). For this purpose, rotational drive mechanisms 21B and 22B such as motors are provided on the arms 21 and 22, respectively (see FIG. 7). The drive control of the rotation drive mechanisms 21B and 22B is executed by a controller provided in the power supply box 13 in accordance with a command from the console 15 described later.

 なお、本実施形態では、図8に示す円軌道Tx、Tdは、それぞれ、XY面で見たときの前述した第1、第2の軸AXs、AXdの軌道を示している。本実施形態では、前述した回転駆動機構83によって互いに独立して回転駆動されるアーム2、22に2軸の回転自由度が与えられ、X線管23の自転(所謂、首振り回転)及び検出器24の自転(所謂、首振り回転)に2軸の回転自由度が与えられる。これにより、合計4軸の回転自由度が与えられている。 In this embodiment, the circular trajectories Tx and Td shown in FIG. 8 indicate the trajectories of the first and second axes AXs and AXd described above when viewed on the XY plane, respectively. In the present embodiment, biaxial rotational degrees of freedom are given to the arms 2 and 22 that are driven to rotate independently of each other by the rotary drive mechanism 83 described above, so that the X-ray tube 23 rotates (so-called swinging rotation) and is detected. Two-axis rotational freedom is given to the rotation (so-called swinging rotation) of the device 24. This gives a total of four axes of rotational freedom.

 検出器24は、X線撮像素子を2次元に配列した、複数の検出モジュールを有する。複数の検出モジュールは互いに独立したブロックとして作成され、それらを基板上に所定の矩形状に実装して検出器24の全体が作成される。 The detector 24 has a plurality of detection modules in which X-ray imaging elements are two-dimensionally arranged. The plurality of detection modules are formed as blocks independent from each other, and are mounted on the substrate in a predetermined rectangular shape to form the entire detector 24.

 この検出器24の構造及びその検出信号のサブピクセル法による処理は、例えば国際公開公報WO 2012/086648A1により知られている。 The structure of the detector 24 and the processing of the detection signal by the sub-pixel method are known from, for example, International Publication WO 2012 / 0886648A1.

 個々の検出モジュールはX線を直接、電気パルス信号に変換する半導体材料で作成される。このため、検出器24は、半導体による直接変換方式の光子計数型X線検出器である。 Each detection module is made of a semiconductor material that converts X-rays directly into electrical pulse signals. For this reason, the detector 24 is a photon counting X-ray detector of a direct conversion method using a semiconductor.

 検出モジュールそれぞれの画素数は例えば40×40画素であり、各画素Sのサイズは例えば200μm×200μmである。この画素サイズは、入射するX線を多数の光子の集まりとして検出可能な値に設定されている。各画素は、X線の各光子の入射に反応し、各光子が持つエネルギに応じた振幅の電気パルスを出力する。つまり、各画素は、その画素に入射するX線を直接、電気信号に変換することができる。 The number of pixels each detection module is 40 × 40 pixels, for example, the size of each pixel S n is 200 [mu] m × 200 [mu] m, for example. This pixel size is set to a value that allows detection of incident X-rays as a collection of many photons. Each pixel responds to the incidence of each photon of the X-ray and outputs an electric pulse having an amplitude corresponding to the energy of each photon. That is, each pixel can directly convert X-rays incident on the pixel into an electrical signal.

 このため、検出器24は、入射するX線の光子を、検出器24の検出面を構成する画素毎に計数して、その計数した値を反映させた電気量のデータを例えば300fpsの高いフレームレートで出力する。このデータはフレームデータとも呼ばれる。 For this reason, the detector 24 counts the incident X-ray photons for each pixel constituting the detection surface of the detector 24, and outputs the electric quantity data reflecting the counted value, for example, a high frame of 300 fps. Output at the rate. This data is also called frame data.

 半導体層、すなわち半導体セルの半導体材料としては、テルル化カドミウム半導体(CdTe半導体)、カドミュームジンクテルライド半導体(CdZnTe半導体(CZT半導体))、シリコン半導体(Si半導体)、臭化タリューム(T1Br)、ヨウ化水銀(HgI)などが用いられる。なお、この半導体セルを用いる検出器の代わりに、フォトダイオードとシンチレータの組合せ構造を持つ検出器を用いてもよい。 As the semiconductor material of the semiconductor layer, that is, the semiconductor cell, cadmium telluride semiconductor (CdTe semiconductor), cadmium zinc telluride semiconductor (CdZnTe semiconductor (CZT semiconductor)), silicon semiconductor (Si semiconductor), thallium bromide (T1Br), Mercury iodide (HgI 2 ) or the like is used. Note that a detector having a combination structure of a photodiode and a scintillator may be used instead of the detector using the semiconductor cell.

 一方、このパノラマ撮影装置1では、その4本のレーザビームを位置決め手段として使用している。具体的には、背面部14Bの撮影空間Sの側の上部に設けた正中レーザ211、及び、検出器アーム22の対向アーム部分22Bの側面の所定位置それぞれに設けた水平レーザ212、咬合平面レーザ213、及び犬歯レーザ214を備える(図7参照)。これらのレーザ211~214は、位置決めのときに線状のレーザマーカを被検体Pの頭部に投影させるもので、コンソール15を介してその駆動が制御される。正中レーザ211は、被検体Pの頭部Hの正中線を、水平レーザ212はフランクフルト平面を、咬合平面レーザ213は咬合平面を、犬歯レーザ214は歯列の中の犬歯をそれぞれ位置合わせするためのものである(図14、(B´)参照)。 On the other hand, in this panoramic photographing apparatus 1, the four laser beams are used as positioning means. Specifically, a midline laser 211 provided on the upper side of the imaging space S side of the back surface portion 14B, a horizontal laser 212 provided at each predetermined position on the side surface of the opposing arm portion 22B of the detector arm 22, and an occlusal plane laser 213 and the canine laser 214 (see FIG. 7). These lasers 211 to 214 project a linear laser marker onto the head of the subject P during positioning, and their drive is controlled via the console 15. The median laser 211 aligns the midline of the head H of the subject P, the horizontal laser 212 aligns the Frankfurt plane, the occlusal plane laser 213 aligns the occlusal plane, and the canine laser 214 aligns the canines in the dentition. (See FIG. 14, (B ′)).

 さらに、フェイルセーフ用のセンサとして、衝撃を検知するショックセンサ215、216がX線管アーム21及び検出器アーム22の対向アーム部分21B、22Bにそれぞれ設置されている(図7参照)。これは万が一、例えば、それらのアーム21、22に何か物が当たったときに、それを感知してスキャンを中止させるもので、それらショックセンサ215、216の出力信号はコンソール15も送られる。 Furthermore, shock sensors 215 and 216 for detecting an impact are installed on the opposing arm portions 21B and 22B of the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22 as fail-safe sensors, respectively (see FIG. 7). This is because, for example, when something hits the arms 21 and 22, it senses that and stops scanning, and the output signals of the shock sensors 215 and 216 are also sent to the console 15.

 コンソール15は、図9に示すように、信号の入出力を担うインターフェース(I/F)131を備え、このインターフェース131にバス132を介して通信可能に接続されたコントローラ133、第1の記憶部134、データプロセッサ(CPU)135、表示器136、入力器137、キャリブレーション演算器138、第2の記憶部139、第1~第4のROM140A~140D、及び閾値付与器140Eを備えている。 As shown in FIG. 9, the console 15 includes an interface (I / F) 131 that performs input and output of signals, a controller 133 that is communicably connected to the interface 131 via a bus 132, and a first storage unit 134, a data processor (CPU) 135, a display device 136, an input device 137, a calibration calculator 138, a second storage unit 139, first to fourth ROMs 140A to 140D, and a threshold value assigner 140E.

 コントローラ133は、第1のROM140Aに予め与えられたプログラムに沿ってパノラマ撮影装置1の駆動を制御する。この制御には、X線管23に高電圧を供給する高電圧発生装置140Fへの指令値の送出、スリット84の開口面積を変更するために開口駆動部85への指令値の送出、及びキャリブレーション演算器138への駆動指令も含まれる。第1の記憶部134は、検出器24からインターフェース131を介して送られてきた計数値であるフレームデータ、及び、画像データを保管する。また、コントローラ133は、照射スイッチ56のスイッチ信号をインターフェース131を介して受信し、後述するようにスキャンを制御する。同様に、コントローラ133は、ショックセンサ215、216の信号もインターフェース131を介して受信し、後述するスキャンの継続・中止を制御する。さらに、コントローラ133はインターフェースを131を介して、位置決め用のレーザ151~154に接続され、位置決めが指令が出されたときに、それらのレーザ151~154を駆動するように構成されている。 The controller 133 controls the driving of the panorama photographing apparatus 1 in accordance with a program given in advance to the first ROM 140A. For this control, a command value is sent to the high voltage generator 140F that supplies a high voltage to the X-ray tube 23, a command value is sent to the opening drive unit 85 to change the opening area of the slit 84, and calibration is performed. A drive command to the operation calculator 138 is also included. The first storage unit 134 stores frame data and image data that are count values sent from the detector 24 via the interface 131. Further, the controller 133 receives the switch signal of the irradiation switch 56 via the interface 131, and controls scanning as will be described later. Similarly, the controller 133 also receives the signals of the shock sensors 215 and 216 via the interface 131, and controls the continuation / stop of the scan described later. Further, the controller 133 is connected to the positioning lasers 151 to 154 via the interface 131, and is configured to drive the lasers 151 to 154 when a positioning command is issued.

 データプロセッサ135は、コントローラ133の管理の下に、第2のROM140Bに予め与えられたプログラムに基づいて動作する。また、パノラマ撮影のときに、データプロセッサ135は、その動作により、第1の記憶部134に保管されたフレームデータに、公知のシフト・アンド・アッド(shift and add)と呼ばれる演算法に基づくトモシンセシス法を実施する。これにより、被検者Pの口腔部のある断層面のパノラマ画像が得られる。表示器136は、作成される画像の表示や、装置の動作状況を示す情報及び入力器137を介して与えられるオペレータの操作情報の表示を担う。入力器137は、オペレータが撮像に必要な情報を装置に与えるために使用される。 The data processor 135 operates based on a program given in advance to the second ROM 140B under the control of the controller 133. Further, during panoramic shooting, the data processor 135, by its operation, adds to the frame data stored in the first storage unit 134 tomosynthesis based on a known calculation method called shift add add. Implement the law. Thereby, the panoramic image of the tomographic plane with the oral cavity of the subject P is obtained. The display device 136 is responsible for displaying images to be created, information indicating the operation status of the apparatus, and operator operation information provided via the input device 137. The input device 137 is used by an operator to give information necessary for imaging to the apparatus.

 また、キャリブレーション演算器138は、コントローラ133の管理の下に、第3のROM140Cに予め内蔵されているプログラムの下で動作し、データ計数回路における画素毎のエネルギ弁別回路毎に与える、X線エネルギ弁別のためのデジタル量の閾値をキャリブレーションする。 In addition, the calibration calculator 138 operates under the control of the controller 133 under a program built in the third ROM 140C in advance, and is given to each energy discrimination circuit for each pixel in the data counting circuit. Calibrate digital quantity thresholds for energy discrimination.

 閾値付与器140Eは、コントローラ133の制御の下で、撮像時に第2の記憶部139に格納されているデジタル量の閾値を画素毎に且つ弁別回路毎に呼び出して、その閾値を指令値としてインターフェース131を介して検出器24の光子計数回路に送信する。この処理を実行するため、閾値付与器140Eは第4のROM140Dに予め格納されたプログラムを実行する。 Under the control of the controller 133, the threshold value assigner 140E calls the digital amount threshold value stored in the second storage unit 139 for each pixel and for each discrimination circuit at the time of imaging, and uses the threshold value as a command value as an interface. The signal is transmitted to the photon counting circuit of the detector 24 via 131. In order to execute this process, the threshold value assigner 140E executes a program stored in advance in the fourth ROM 140D.

 コントローラ133、データプロセッサ135、キャリブレーション演算器138、閾値付与器140Eは共に、与えられたプログラムで稼動するCPU(中央処理装置)を備えている。それらのプログラムは、第1~第4のROM140A~140Dのそれぞれに事前に格納されている。 The controller 133, the data processor 135, the calibration calculator 138, and the threshold value assigner 140E all include a CPU (central processing unit) that operates according to a given program. These programs are stored in advance in the first to fourth ROMs 140A to 140D, respectively.

 また、本実施形態では、国際公開公報WO2011/142343(国際出願番号PCT/JP2011/060731)により知られるように、ファントムを使って撮影空間Sの構造が解析され、検出器24の収集チャンネルがキャリブレートされる。このキャリブレーションは撮像前、保守点検時などの適宜なタイミングで実行される。 In this embodiment, as known from International Publication No. WO2011 / 142343 (International Application No. PCT / JP2011 / 060731), the structure of the imaging space S is analyzed using a phantom, and the collection channel of the detector 24 is calibrated. Is done. This calibration is executed at an appropriate timing such as before imaging or during maintenance inspection.

 図10に、標準的な歯列TR、この歯列TRの馬蹄形の3D基準断層面のXY面への投影の軌跡SS(標準軌道と呼ぶ)、頸椎CSの位置、及び、被検者Pの顎部JWの周方向CRにおける各回転角θの位置におけるX線ビームのパスXBを例示する。なお、このパスXBは、X線管23のX線焦点FPと検出器24の検出面24A(図8参照)の横幅方向(Y軸方向)の中心位置Cとを結ぶ経路を示す。 FIG. 10 shows a standard dentition TR, a trajectory SS (referred to as a standard trajectory) of projection of the horseshoe-shaped 3D reference tomographic plane of the dentition TR onto the XY plane, the position of the cervical vertebra CS, and the subject P An X-ray beam path XB at each rotation angle θ in the circumferential direction CR of the jaw JW is illustrated. The path XB indicates a path connecting the X-ray focal point FP of the X-ray tube 23 and the center position C in the horizontal width direction (Y-axis direction) of the detection surface 24A (see FIG. 8) of the detector 24.

 なお、図7、8から分かるように、X線管23の管焦点FPは第1の軸(即ち、X線管の首振り回転中心軸)AXsの線上に位置し、検出器24の検出面24Aの横幅方向の中心位置Cは第2の軸(即ち、検出器の首振り回転中心軸)AXdの線上に位置する。これにより、X線管23及び検出器24の自転(回動)とX線パスの幾何学的な位置関係が簡単になり、X線管23及び検出器24の姿勢制御の設計がより容易になる。 As can be seen from FIGS. 7 and 8, the tube focal point FP of the X-ray tube 23 is located on the line of the first axis (that is, the central axis of swinging of the X-ray tube) AXs, and the detection surface of the detector 24 The center position C in the lateral width direction of 24A is located on the line of the second axis (that is, the center axis of rotation rotation of the detector) AXd. This simplifies the geometric positional relationship between the rotation (rotation) of the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 and the X-ray path, and makes it easier to design the attitude control of the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24. Become.

 この3D基準断層面の軌跡SS(標準軌道)に対して、例えば標準撮影及び直交撮影と呼ばれる2種類の撮影法(共にパノラマ撮影)を実施するための速度パターンを設定できる。標準撮影は、この軌跡SSに対して左右の顎骨をなるべく回避するようにX線を照射する撮影法である。直交撮影はこの軌跡SSに対して常になるべくパスが直交するようにX線を照射する撮影法である。なお、図10は、標準撮影におけるスキャン範囲θ=220°(所定の折返し位置をθ=0°にすれば±110°の範囲)の半分におけるX線パスを模式的に示している。 For example, a speed pattern for performing two types of photographing methods (both panoramic photographing) called standard photographing and orthogonal photographing can be set for the locus SS (standard orbit) of the 3D reference tomographic plane. The standard imaging is an imaging method in which X-rays are irradiated so as to avoid the left and right jaw bones as much as possible with respect to the locus SS. The orthogonal imaging is an imaging method in which X-rays are irradiated so that the path is always orthogonal to the locus SS. FIG. 10 schematically shows an X-ray path in a half of the scan range θ = 220 ° in standard imaging (a range of ± 110 ° if the predetermined folding position is θ = 0 °).

 更に、同じ標準撮影であっても、3D基準断層面の軌跡SS(標準軌道)の大きさが大人、子供等の違いによって異なる。直交撮影も同様である。このため、予め、標準撮影及び/又は直交撮影のための複数種類の速度パターンが、X線管23の中心軸CAの周りの周方向の部分的な範囲の回転(ここでは部分的な公転)、X線管23の軸AXsを中心とした部分的な範囲の回転(ここでは部分的な自転)、検出器24の中心軸CAの周りの周方向の部分的な範囲の回転(部分的な公転)、及び検出器24の軸AXdを中心とした部分的な範囲の回転(部分的な自転)に伴うって用意されている。 Furthermore, even with the same standard imaging, the size of the trajectory SS (standard trajectory) of the 3D reference tomographic plane varies depending on the difference between adults and children. The same applies to orthogonal shooting. For this reason, a plurality of types of velocity patterns for standard imaging and / or orthogonal imaging are preliminarily rotated in a partial range in the circumferential direction around the central axis CA of the X-ray tube 23 (here, partial revolution). , Rotation of a partial range around the axis AXs of the X-ray tube 23 (here, partial rotation), rotation of a partial range in the circumferential direction around the central axis CA of the detector 24 (partial rotation) Revolving) and a partial range of rotation about the axis AXd of the detector 24 (partial rotation).

 この速度パターンは、横軸にスキャン時間(例えば12秒)を採り、縦軸に公転又は自転の角度を採ったものである。なお、本実施形態において、公転とは、X線管23及び検出器24が中心軸CAから所定距離離れた軌道Tx、Tdのそれぞれに沿って周方向に回転又は回動することであり、自転とはX線管23及び検出器24それ自体がそれぞれの回転軸AXs、AXdの周りに回転又は回動することである。また、部分的とは周方向全体の一部の範囲を回転することであり、また360の自転範囲のうちの一部の角度範囲を指す。 This speed pattern is obtained by taking the scan time (for example, 12 seconds) on the horizontal axis and the revolution or rotation angle on the vertical axis. In this embodiment, the revolution means that the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 rotate or rotate in the circumferential direction along each of the trajectories Tx and Td that are separated from the central axis CA by a predetermined distance. Means that the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 themselves rotate or rotate around the respective rotation axes AXs and AXd. Further, “partial” refers to rotating a partial range in the entire circumferential direction, and refers to a partial angular range in the 360 rotation range.

 図11及び図12に、標準撮影及び直交撮影を行うときのX線管23の公転及び自転を示す速度パターン及び検出器24の公転及び自転を示す速度パターンを例示する。例えば、図11、12それぞれの曲線A、Bは図10に示すように周方向の角度θを設定したときの約220°の範囲におけるX線管23及び検出器24の大人用の直交撮影向けの公転及び自転の速度パターンをそれぞれ示す。この速度パターンA、Bから分かるように、左右の顎骨の部分はなるべく粗くスキャンするように、それらの部分で回転速度を上げ、歯列TRの部分で密になるように速度が設定されている。同様に、図11、12それぞれの曲線A´、B´は、かかる約220°の範囲におけるX線管23及び検出器24の大人用の標準撮影向けの公転及び自転の速度パターンをそれぞれ示す。 11 and 12 illustrate a speed pattern indicating the revolution and rotation of the X-ray tube 23 and a speed pattern indicating the revolution and rotation of the detector 24 when performing standard imaging and orthogonal imaging. For example, the curves A and B in FIGS. 11 and 12 are for orthogonal imaging for adults of the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 in the range of about 220 ° when the circumferential angle θ is set as shown in FIG. The revolving and rotation speed patterns are shown respectively. As can be seen from these speed patterns A and B, the rotation speed is increased in these portions so that the left and right jawbone portions are scanned as roughly as possible, and the speed is set so as to be dense in the dentition TR portion. . Similarly, curves A ′ and B ′ in FIGS. 11 and 12 respectively show the revolution and rotation speed patterns of the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 for standard imaging for adults in the range of about 220 °.

 なお、子供用の直交撮影及び標準撮影向けの公転及び自転の速度パターンは、図11及び図12における横軸1~11秒に部分を利用している。つまり、公転及び自転の角度範囲は同じであるが、収集時間を短縮することによって、収集範囲が小さめの子供用の標準軌道を確保している。これは、子供と大人の歯列の違いは、大人になるほど奥歯側の顎部が発達するが、前歯側の大きさはそれほど変わらないという統計に依る。 Note that the rotation and rotation speed patterns for orthogonal shooting and standard shooting for children use the portion of the horizontal axis 1 to 11 seconds in FIGS. 11 and 12. In other words, although the angular range of revolution and rotation is the same, a standard trajectory for children with a smaller collection range is secured by shortening the collection time. This is based on the statistics that the dentition between the child and the adult grows as the adult grows, but the size of the front teeth does not change much.

 また、図12の曲線A、BはX線管23及び検出器24の部分的な自転、所謂、一定角度内の首振りの速度パターンを示す。この一定角度として、約±15°が設定されている。なお、この角度は、X線管23及び検出器24が互いに正対している状態のときに角度=0°と設定されている。この首振りは、上述した図11に示すように、X線管23及び検出器24それ自体の公転速度が一定でないため、X線パスXBが常に中心軸CAを通るパスにはならず、むしろ中心軸CAを外したX線パスXBの方が遥かに多い。これは、図10の矢印YJで示す如く、X線パスXBの設計の自由度を上げるためである。X線パスXBが中心軸CAを通らないときには、何もしないとX線管23と検出器24は互いに正対状態からずれて検出感度が低下する。このため、X線パスが中心軸CAを通らない場合、そのX線パスXBの中心軸CAからのずれ量に応じてX線管23及び検出器24の首振りを協働的に行う必要がある。勿論、検出器24の内の一方の首振りでもよいが、その場合、X線パスXBの設定の自由度が下がるので、両者の首振りを併用した方がよい。このような速度パターンは、メーカ側で装置に事前にインストールしている。 Further, curves A and B in FIG. 12 show partial rotations of the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24, that is, so-called swing patterns within a certain angle. As this constant angle, about ± 15 ° is set. This angle is set to 0 ° when the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 face each other. As shown in FIG. 11, the swinging of the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 itself is not constant, so the X-ray path XB does not always pass through the central axis CA. There are far more X-ray paths XB with the central axis CA removed. This is to increase the degree of freedom in designing the X-ray path XB as indicated by the arrow YJ in FIG. When the X-ray path XB does not pass through the central axis CA, if nothing is done, the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 are deviated from the facing state and the detection sensitivity is lowered. Therefore, when the X-ray path does not pass through the central axis CA, it is necessary to cooperatively swing the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 according to the amount of deviation of the X-ray path XB from the central axis CA. is there. Of course, it is possible to swing one of the detectors 24, but in this case, the degree of freedom in setting the X-ray path XB is lowered, so it is better to use both swings together. Such a speed pattern is installed in advance in the apparatus by the manufacturer.

 つまり、本実施形態において用意されている速度パターンの種類は、
 ・大人用標準撮影の速度パターン(図11の曲線A´、B´及び図12の曲線A´、B´から成る速度パターン群)、
 ・大人用直交撮影の速度パターン(図11の曲線A、B及び図12の曲線A、Bから成る速度パターン群)、
 ・子供用標準撮影の速度パターン(図11における時間短縮された曲線A´、B´及び図12における時間短縮された曲線A´、B´から成る速度パターン群)、
 ・大人用直交撮影の速度パターン(図11における時間短縮された曲線A、B及び図12における時間短縮された曲線A、Bから成る速度パターン群)、
である。
That is, the types of speed patterns prepared in this embodiment are
・ Speed pattern of standard shooting for adults (speed pattern group consisting of curves A ′ and B ′ in FIG. 11 and curves A ′ and B ′ in FIG. 12),
-Speed pattern for orthogonal shooting for adults (speed pattern group consisting of curves A and B in FIG. 11 and curves A and B in FIG. 12),
Speed pattern for standard shooting for children (speed pattern group consisting of time-reduced curves A ′ and B ′ in FIG. 11 and time-reduced curves A ′ and B ′ in FIG. 12),
・ Adult orthogonal shooting speed pattern (speed pattern group consisting of time-reduced curves A and B in FIG. 11 and time-reduced curves A and B in FIG. 12),
It is.

 さらに、X線管23及び検出器24の速度パターンについては、上述したような標準的な3D基準断層面に対するものとは限らない。これは、任意形状の3D基準断層面に対する速度パターンであってもよい。例えば、前述した図10に示す3D基準断層面のXY面への投影軌跡(標準軌道)SSの形状が、前歯付近がより狭まったり或いは広くなったりした馬蹄形であることもある。逆に奥歯付近がより狭い或いは広い馬蹄形を成すこともある。そのような変形した投影軌跡SSを持つ3D基準断層面に対する標準撮影及び/又は直交撮影を行う上記4種類の速度パターンを設定することもできる。そのような変形形状に係る速度パターンは、システム側で事前に準備しておくこともできるし、医療現場又は研究の場でコンピュータに計算させて記憶させておくこともできる。 Furthermore, the velocity patterns of the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 are not necessarily those for the standard 3D reference tomographic plane as described above. This may be a velocity pattern for an arbitrarily shaped 3D reference tomographic plane. For example, the shape of the projection trajectory (standard trajectory) SS on the XY plane of the 3D reference tomographic plane shown in FIG. 10 described above may be a horseshoe shape in which the vicinity of the front teeth is narrower or wider. Conversely, the back teeth may form a narrower or wider horseshoe shape. It is also possible to set the above four types of velocity patterns for performing standard imaging and / or orthogonal imaging on a 3D reference tomographic plane having such a modified projection locus SS. The velocity pattern related to such a deformed shape can be prepared in advance on the system side, or can be calculated and stored in a computer at a medical site or a research site.

 このように高い自由度を以って設定された複数の速度パターンは、第1の記憶部134(記憶手段:図9参照)にテーブルとして格納されている。このため、コントローラ133は、この第1の記憶部134から、オペレータとのインターラクティブなやり取りを介して、所望の速度パターンをそのワークエリアに読み出す。スキャンが開始されると、コントローラ133は読み出されている速度パターンに従って図9に示す回転駆動機構83、21B、22Bを制御する。これにより、X線管23から照射され、被検体Pの顎部JWを通って検出器24に入射するX線は、周方向の回転角θ毎に、所望の標準撮影又は直交撮影で指定されているパスXBを通る。このため、検出器24は常にX線管23に正対した姿勢を維持しつつ、検出したフレームデータを出力する。このフレームデータは、データプロセッサ135によりパノラマ画像に再構成される。 The plurality of speed patterns set with such a high degree of freedom are stored as a table in the first storage unit 134 (storage means: see FIG. 9). For this reason, the controller 133 reads out a desired speed pattern from the first storage unit 134 to the work area through interactive exchange with the operator. When the scan is started, the controller 133 controls the rotation drive mechanisms 83, 21B, and 22B shown in FIG. 9 according to the read speed pattern. As a result, X-rays irradiated from the X-ray tube 23 and incident on the detector 24 through the jaw JW of the subject P are designated by desired standard imaging or orthogonal imaging for each rotation angle θ in the circumferential direction. Pass the path XB. For this reason, the detector 24 always outputs the detected frame data while maintaining a posture facing the X-ray tube 23. This frame data is reconstructed into a panoramic image by the data processor 135.

 次いで、図13をも参照しながら、本実施形態に係るX線パノラマ撮影装置1によるX線パノラマ撮影の手順の一例を説明する。 Next, an example of the procedure of X-ray panoramic imaging by the X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus 1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

 このX線パノラマ撮影装置1を使用するときには、まず、この装置1を歯科用治療椅子2の後ろ側の所定位置に位置付け、床面に固定する。このときに、前述した操作レバー52を操作してピン50を押し下げ、そのピン50をフロア固定部53に係合させる。これにより、X線パノラマ撮影装置1の本体BDの歯科用治療椅子2に対する位置付け及び固定が達成される。これにより、歯科用治療椅子2に座った状態でその背もたれを倒したときに、患者Pの頭部Hに対するX線パノラマ装置1のスキャンの位置決めが容易になる。 When using the X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus 1, first, the apparatus 1 is positioned at a predetermined position on the back side of the dental treatment chair 2 and fixed to the floor surface. At this time, the operation lever 52 described above is operated to push the pin 50 down, and the pin 50 is engaged with the floor fixing portion 53. Thereby, positioning and fixation with respect to the dental treatment chair 2 of the main body BD of the X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus 1 are achieved. This facilitates the positioning of the scan of the X-ray panorama apparatus 1 with respect to the head H of the patient P when the backrest is tilted while sitting on the dental treatment chair 2.

 このX線パノラマ撮影装置1の位置付けが終わると、オペレータ(又は歯科医)は装置の電源をオンにする。これにより、コンソール15のコントローラ133が起動して以下の処理をインターラクティブに実行する。まず、コントローラ133は、表示器136にログイン画面を表示させるので、ログインを行う(図13、ステップS1)。これが済むと、コントローラ133は表示器136にパノラマ撮影用のGUI(graphical user interface)(図示せず)を表示させる。このため、このGUIが提供する患者情報入力画面から、歯科医は患者情報(撮影日時、患者ID、患者名など)を入力する(ステップS2)。 When the positioning of the X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus 1 is finished, the operator (or dentist) turns on the apparatus. As a result, the controller 133 of the console 15 is activated and interactively executes the following processing. First, the controller 133 displays a login screen on the display 136, and thus performs login (FIG. 13, step S1). After this, the controller 133 causes the display 136 to display a panoramic shooting GUI (graphical user interface) (not shown). For this reason, the dentist inputs patient information (imaging date, patient ID, patient name, etc.) from the patient information input screen provided by this GUI (step S2).

 次いで、同様に、表示器136のGUI画面上で撮影種別の選択が行われる(ステップS3)。この撮影種別は、本実施形態においては、デフォルトで設定されている、大人用の標準撮影、大人用の直交撮影、子供用の標準撮影、子供用の直交撮影の4種類の中から1種類が選択される。勿論、カスタマイズされたサイズの軌道を持つ撮影法が設定されていれば、それを選択してもよい。この選択に応じて、コントローラ133は、第1の記憶部134のテーブルから、選択された撮影法を実施するための速度パターンがそのワークエリアに読み出される。例えば、大人用の標準撮影が選択された場合、図11、12に記載の速度パターンA´、B´の4種類のパターンデータが読み出される。 Next, in the same manner, a shooting type is selected on the GUI screen of the display 136 (step S3). In this embodiment, one of the four types of shooting, which is set by default, is standard shooting for adults, orthogonal shooting for adults, standard shooting for children, and orthogonal shooting for children. Selected. Of course, if an imaging method having a customized size trajectory is set, it may be selected. In response to this selection, the controller 133 reads a speed pattern for executing the selected imaging method from the table in the first storage unit 134 to the work area. For example, when standard shooting for adults is selected, four types of pattern data of speed patterns A ′ and B ′ illustrated in FIGS. 11 and 12 are read out.

 次いで、撮影条件が設定される(ステップS4)。この設定は、管電圧及び管電流を設定するものであり、上述のように撮影種別が選択されると、コントローラ133は自動的に推奨撮影条件を設定するが、これをカスタマイズできるGUIがこのステップである。 Next, shooting conditions are set (step S4). This setting is to set the tube voltage and tube current. When the shooting type is selected as described above, the controller 133 automatically sets the recommended shooting conditions. It is.

 この撮影条件の設定が済むと、コントローラ133は歯科医による患者Pの位置付けを行うように画面表示し、その間待機する(ステップS5)。 When the imaging conditions are set, the controller 133 displays the screen so that the dentist positions the patient P, and waits during that time (step S5).

 そこで、歯科医は、患者P及び介添者にX線防護衣を着用させ、患者Pを歯科用治療椅子2に座らせる。次いで、散乱線遮蔽カバー14Cを手動で後ろ側に退避させる(図3の仮想線「退避位置」参照)。この段階では、X線管アーム21及び検出器アーム22はそれぞれの待機位置に位置付けられている(図14(A)参照)。 Therefore, the dentist causes the patient P and his / her attendant to wear X-ray protective clothing, and causes the patient P to sit on the dental treatment chair 2. Next, the scattered radiation shielding cover 14 </ b> C is manually retracted to the rear side (see an imaginary line “retraction position” in FIG. 3). At this stage, the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22 are positioned at the respective standby positions (see FIG. 14A).

 さらに、患者Pの頭部Hをその治療椅子2のヘッドレストHRに付けたまま、その背もたれを倒して頭部Hを撮影空間Sに導入する。このとき、前述したように、パノラマ撮影装置1の本体BDと歯科用治療椅子2とは床面を介し互いに固定された状態にある。それ故、歯科用治療椅子2のヘッドレストHR(図3参照)は、撮影空間Sのほぼ中央に位置する。つまり、患者Pの頭部Hも撮影空間Sにおいて待機しているX線管アーム21及び検出器アーム22の相互のほぼ中間部に案内される。 Furthermore, with the head H of the patient P attached to the headrest HR of the treatment chair 2, the backrest is tilted and the head H is introduced into the imaging space S. At this time, as described above, the main body BD of the panoramic photographing apparatus 1 and the dental treatment chair 2 are fixed to each other via the floor surface. Therefore, the headrest HR (see FIG. 3) of the dental treatment chair 2 is located at the approximate center of the imaging space S. In other words, the head H of the patient P is also guided to a substantially intermediate portion between the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22 waiting in the imaging space S.

 この導入が終わると、歯科医は表示器136のGUIのレーザ照射ボタン(図示せず)を押して位置決めの照射ボタンを押す。これに応答して、コントローラ133は、検出器アーム22のみを回転させて位置決め用の位置、即ち、患者の頭部Hの真横の位置に移動させる(図14(B)参照)。さらに、コントローラ133は正中レーザ211、水平レーザ212、咬合平面レーザ213、及び犬歯レーザ214を駆動させる(ステップS6)。この4種類のレーザビームは患者Pの顔に投影される(図14(B´)参照)。 When this introduction is completed, the dentist presses the GUI laser irradiation button (not shown) of the display 136 and presses the positioning irradiation button. In response to this, the controller 133 rotates only the detector arm 22 and moves it to a positioning position, that is, a position directly beside the patient's head H (see FIG. 14B). Further, the controller 133 drives the midline laser 211, the horizontal laser 212, the occlusal plane laser 213, and the canine laser 214 (step S6). These four types of laser beams are projected onto the face of the patient P (see FIG. 14B ′).

 次いで、表示器136のGUIは歯科医に患者Pの顔の位置決めを行うように指示する(ステップS7)。まず、歯科医は、犬歯レーザ214からの線状のビームBM1が患者Pの犬歯に合うように、昇降機14の高さをコントローラ133を介して調整する。次いで、残りのレーザ211~213からのビームを見ながら、患者の顔の位置を微調整する。具体的には、咬合平面レーザ213からの線状のビームBM2が患者Pの咬合平面に合うように患者の体軸方向の位置を調整する。また、頭部Hの正中矢状面が正中レーザ211からの線状のビームBM3に重なるように合わせる。さらに、フランクフルト平面が水平レーザ212から照射された線状のビームBM4に重なるように合わせる。 Next, the GUI of the display 136 instructs the dentist to position the face of the patient P (step S7). First, the dentist adjusts the height of the elevator 14 via the controller 133 so that the linear beam BM1 from the canine laser 214 matches the canine of the patient P. Next, the position of the patient's face is finely adjusted while viewing the beams from the remaining lasers 211 to 213. Specifically, the position of the patient in the body axis direction is adjusted so that the linear beam BM2 from the occlusal plane laser 213 matches the occlusal plane of the patient P. The midline sagittal plane of the head H is aligned with the linear beam BM3 from the midline laser 211. Further, the Frankfurt plane is aligned with the linear beam BM4 emitted from the horizontal laser 212.

 位置決め後、散乱線遮蔽カバー14Cを前方向の撮影位置まで移動させる(図3の実線「撮影位置」参照)。これにより、図3の実線で示すように、画成された撮影空間Sに被検者Pの頭部Hが位置した状態になる。なお、X線遮蔽をより確実に行うため、この位置決めの後、散乱線遮蔽カバー14Cの前面を鉛入りのX線防護掛布で覆ってもよい。これは、例えば、カバー14Cの前面上部の縁に形成したヒンジ等の着脱自在に掛けることで容易に行える。 After the positioning, the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C is moved to the imaging position in the forward direction (see the solid line “imaging position” in FIG. 3). As a result, as shown by the solid line in FIG. 3, the head H of the subject P is positioned in the defined imaging space S. In order to more reliably perform X-ray shielding, the front surface of the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C may be covered with an X-ray protective cloth containing lead after this positioning. This can be easily performed by detachably attaching a hinge or the like formed on the edge of the upper front surface of the cover 14C.

 そこで、表示器136のGUIは準備完了の表示を行うので、GUI上のセットアップボタンを押す(ステップS8)。これに応答して、コントローラ133はX線管アーム21及び検出器アーム22を所定のセットアップ位置まで回転移動させる(図14(C)参照)。歯科医は、このセットアップ状態を最終確認する。このとき、患者Pの状態やアーム位置等、散乱線遮蔽カバー14Cの内部の状況を、その透光体部分14TRによる窓部分越しに観察して確認することができる。 Therefore, since the GUI of the display 136 displays the completion of preparation, the setup button on the GUI is pressed (step S8). In response to this, the controller 133 rotates the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22 to a predetermined setup position (see FIG. 14C). The dentist finally confirms this setup condition. At this time, the state inside the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C, such as the state of the patient P and the arm position, can be confirmed by observing through the window portion by the translucent portion 14TR.

 この確認で問題が無ければ、歯科医はスキャンを実行する。このスキャンは、歯科医が照射スイッチ56を持って少し離れた場所からそのスイッチ56を押し、且つ押し続けることで実行される(ステップS9)。これにより、前述したように、選択した撮影種別に沿った速度パターンに沿って、X線管アーム21及び検出器アーム22の互いに独立した公転運動、並びに、対向アーム部分21A、22A、即ち、X線管23及び検出器24の自転運動が互いに独立して制御される。つまり、前述した4軸独立制御によるスキャンによってフレームデータの収集が行われる。図14(D)の符号Ks、Kdは、X線管アーム21及び検出器アーム22の公転運動によるX線管23及び検出器24の移動の軌跡を模式的に示している。 If there is no problem with this confirmation, the dentist performs a scan. This scan is executed when the dentist holds the irradiation switch 56 and presses and keeps pressing the switch 56 from a slightly distant place (step S9). Thereby, as described above, the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22 revolve independently of each other along the velocity pattern according to the selected imaging type, and the opposing arm portions 21A, 22A, that is, X The rotational movements of the tube 23 and the detector 24 are controlled independently of each other. That is, the collection of frame data is performed by the scan based on the 4-axis independent control described above. Symbols Ks and Kd in FIG. 14D schematically show the trajectory of the movement of the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 due to the revolving motion of the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22.

 このスキャン中に、歯科医は散乱線遮蔽カバー14Cの透光体部分14TRから内部を見ながら患者の様子を観察している。このため、コントローラ133はスキャン中に、照射スイッチ56のオフ、即ち、歯科医が何等かの不都合を感じて照射スイッチ56の押しボタンを離した(つまり、スイッチOFF)かどうかを監視する(ステップS10)。異常が無ければ、ステップS10の判断はNOとなるので、そのままスキャンを継続させるが、YESの判断の場合、即座にスキャンの中止を各駆動部に指示する(ステップS11)。この監視は、ショックセンサについても同様である(ステップS12、S11)。歯科医は異常が無ければ、照射スイッチ56を押し続けてスキャンが自動的に終了する(ステップS13)。即ち、X線管アーム21及び検出器アーム22は、動作パターンで指令されたスキャン範囲θ(例えば約220°)を移動しながらスキャンし、スキャンが終わると、自動的に初期の退避位置に戻る(図14(D)参照)。 During this scan, the dentist observes the state of the patient while looking inside from the translucent portion 14TR of the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C. Therefore, during the scan, the controller 133 monitors whether the irradiation switch 56 is turned off, that is, whether the dentist feels any inconvenience and releases the push button of the irradiation switch 56 (that is, switch OFF) (step OFF). S10). If there is no abnormality, the determination in step S10 is NO and the scan is continued as it is. However, in the case of YES determination, each drive unit is immediately instructed to stop scanning (step S11). This monitoring is the same for the shock sensor (steps S12 and S11). If there is no abnormality, the dentist continues to press the irradiation switch 56 and the scanning is automatically ended (step S13). That is, the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22 scan while moving within the scan range θ (for example, about 220 °) commanded by the operation pattern, and automatically return to the initial retracted position when the scan is completed. (See FIG. 14D).

 この後、散乱線遮蔽カバー14Cを後ろ側に退避させ、患者を解放する(ステップS13)。 Thereafter, the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C is retracted rearward to release the patient (step S13).

 これにより一連のパノラマ撮影が終わる。このスキャンによって収集されたフレームデータは第1の記憶部134に保管される。このため、データプロセッサ135は、シフト&アッド処理のための所定のプロファイルカーブ(フレームデータ同士の重ね合わせ量を規定する曲線)を用いて、このフレームデータから歯列TRの断層像を再構成することができる。この再構成には、具体的には、例えばUS-2012-0230467 A1公報に記載の手法を採用できる。 This completes a series of panoramic shots. The frame data collected by this scan is stored in the first storage unit 134. For this reason, the data processor 135 reconstructs a tomographic image of the dentition TR from this frame data using a predetermined profile curve (a curve defining the amount of overlap between the frame data) for the shift & add process. be able to. Specifically, for this reconstruction, for example, the technique described in US-2012-0230467 A1 can be adopted.

 [第1の変形例]
 ここで、上述した実施形態に係る変形例(第1の変形例)を図15及び図16を参照して説明する。ここで、前述したパノラマ撮影装置1の構成要素と同一又は同等の機能を発揮する構成要素には同一符号を付して、その説明を省略する。
[First modification]
Here, the modification (1st modification) which concerns on embodiment mentioned above is demonstrated with reference to FIG.15 and FIG.16. Here, the same reference numerals are given to components that exhibit the same or equivalent functions as the components of the panoramic photographing apparatus 1 described above, and the description thereof is omitted.

 図15及び図16には、前述したパノラマ撮影装置1に、前述した駆動機構に代えて搭載可能な本体BDの内部構造の一例を示すもので、外側を覆うカバー等を取り外した状態を示している。 FIGS. 15 and 16 show an example of the internal structure of the main body BD that can be mounted on the panoramic photographing apparatus 1 in place of the drive mechanism described above, and shows a state in which a cover or the like covering the outside is removed. Yes.

 この例の場合、その構造は至ってシンプル化されており、床面を介して歯科用治療椅子2に位置決めされるベース部BSと、このベース部BSから立脚する高さ調整可能なタワー部TWと、このタワー部TWの上部に設けた駆動部DVと、その上部の位置で当該タワー部TWに横向き取り付けられると共に駆動部DVにリンクするアーム部AMとを備える。 In the case of this example, the structure is extremely simplified, and a base part BS that is positioned on the dental treatment chair 2 via the floor surface, and a tower part TW that can be height-adjusted from the base part BS, The driving unit DV provided on the upper portion of the tower unit TW, and the arm unit AM which is attached to the tower unit TW at the upper position and is linked to the driving unit DV.

 このうち、ベース部BSは前述した実施形態と同様に台座部12を有し、その上にテレスコピック型の昇降機141が取り付けられている。この昇降機141は前述した実施形態で説明した昇降機14の機能を担う。この昇降機141は、高さ方向に例えば270mmのストロークを以って、内側の固定支柱に対して外側の可動支柱142が上下動可能に構成されている。この昇降機141にはDCモータ及び高さセンサ等の駆動機構が内蔵されている。 Among these, the base portion BS has the pedestal portion 12 as in the above-described embodiment, and a telescopic elevator 141 is mounted thereon. The elevator 141 has the function of the elevator 14 described in the above-described embodiment. The elevator 141 is configured such that the outer movable strut 142 can move up and down with respect to the inner fixed strut with a stroke of, for example, 270 mm in the height direction. The elevator 141 incorporates a drive mechanism such as a DC motor and a height sensor.

 この可動支柱142には、前述した回転駆動機構83と同様の回転機構を持つ駆動部DVが設けられている。この駆動部DVは、可動支柱142の上部の両側面から突設させた支持板143、144と、それらの支持板143、144にそれぞれ配設した電磁ブレーキ付きでギアボックス付の電動モータ145、146とを備える。また、駆動部DVは、可動支柱142の上部を、支持板143、144の突設方向に直交する前後方向(Z軸方向)に貫通して設けられた回転駆動機構147を備える。この回転駆動機構147の前面側の端部は可動支柱142から突設しており、この突設した部分に、前述したX線管アーム21の支持部21L及び検出器アーム22の支持部22Lが同軸状に取り付けられている。また、この回転駆動機構147の後面側の端部も可動支柱142から突設しており、この突設した部分に、2つの減速機148、149が同軸状に取り付けられている。モータ145、146はそれぞれ、ステッピングモータであり、出力軸側にギアボックス145A、146Aを備えており、これらのギアボックス145A、146Aがベルト150、151を介して減速機148、149にリンクしている。 The movable strut 142 is provided with a drive unit DV having a rotation mechanism similar to the rotation drive mechanism 83 described above. The drive unit DV includes support plates 143 and 144 projecting from both side surfaces of the upper portion of the movable support column 142, and an electric motor 145 with a gear box with electromagnetic brakes disposed on the support plates 143 and 144, respectively. 146. In addition, the drive unit DV includes a rotation drive mechanism 147 provided through the upper part of the movable support column 142 in the front-rear direction (Z-axis direction) orthogonal to the projecting direction of the support plates 143 and 144. The end portion on the front side of the rotation drive mechanism 147 protrudes from the movable column 142, and the support portion 21L of the X-ray tube arm 21 and the support portion 22L of the detector arm 22 described above are provided on the protruding portion. It is attached coaxially. In addition, an end portion on the rear surface side of the rotation drive mechanism 147 also protrudes from the movable column 142, and two speed reducers 148 and 149 are coaxially attached to the protruding portion. Each of the motors 145 and 146 is a stepping motor, and includes gear boxes 145A and 146A on the output shaft side. These gear boxes 145A and 146A are linked to the speed reducers 148 and 149 via belts 150 and 151, respectively. Yes.

 このため、X線管回転用のモータ145が回転すると、その回転力はギアボックス145A及び減速機148により減速されて回転駆動機構147に伝わる。同様に、検出器回転用のモータ146が回転すると、その回転力はギヤボック146A及び減速機149により減速されて回転駆動機構147に伝わる。回転駆動機構147は、その内部に、ベアリング等のよってその内側及び外側で互いに独立して回転を伝える公知のシャフト機構を内蔵する。このため、シャフト機構の内外の2つの軸がX線管アーム21の支持部21L及び検出器アーム22の支持部22Lにそれぞれリンクしている。したがって、X線管回転用のモータ145の回転によってX線管アーム21が前述したように周方向に回転し、また検出器回転用のモータ146の回転によって検出器アーム22が同様に周方向に回転する。それらの回転方向、回転速度、及び回転範囲は、2つのモータ145、146の駆動を別々に制御することで、互いに独立して制御できる。 For this reason, when the motor 145 for rotating the X-ray tube rotates, the rotational force is decelerated by the gear box 145A and the speed reducer 148 and transmitted to the rotation drive mechanism 147. Similarly, when the detector rotating motor 146 rotates, the rotational force is reduced by the gearbox 146A and the speed reducer 149 and transmitted to the rotation drive mechanism 147. The rotation drive mechanism 147 incorporates a known shaft mechanism that transmits rotation independently from each other inside and outside by a bearing or the like. For this reason, two shafts inside and outside the shaft mechanism are linked to the support portion 21L of the X-ray tube arm 21 and the support portion 22L of the detector arm 22, respectively. Accordingly, the rotation of the X-ray tube rotation motor 145 causes the X-ray tube arm 21 to rotate in the circumferential direction as described above, and the rotation of the detector rotation motor 146 similarly causes the detector arm 22 to move in the circumferential direction. Rotate. Their rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation range can be controlled independently of each other by controlling the driving of the two motors 145 and 146 separately.

 また、アーム部AMとして設けられた、X線管用の支持部21L及び検出器用の支持部22Lの先端部には、対向アーム部分21A、22Aの自転運動をさせるためのギアボックス付の電動モータ152、153がそれぞれ設けられている。これらの電動モータ152、153はステッピングモータであり、それらの出力軸は、X線管側及び検出器側の対向アーム部分21A、22Aにそれぞれリンクしている。このため、電動モータ152、153の回転によってX線管側及び検出器側の対向アーム部分21A、22A、即ち、X線管23及び検出器24の前述した自転運動を互いに独立して制御できるようになっている。 An electric motor 152 with a gear box for rotating the opposing arm portions 21A and 22A at the distal ends of the support portion 21L for the X-ray tube and the support portion 22L for the detector provided as the arm portion AM. , 153 are provided. These electric motors 152 and 153 are stepping motors, and their output shafts are linked to the opposing arm portions 21A and 22A on the X-ray tube side and the detector side, respectively. For this reason, the rotation movements of the electric motors 152 and 153 can control the above-described rotational motions of the opposing arm portions 21A and 22A on the X-ray tube side and the detector side, that is, the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24, independently of each other. It has become.

 以上のように、この変形例に係る機構によっても前述した4軸の回転動作を独立して制御でき、前述したスキャン制御を行うことができる。 As described above, the four-axis rotation operation described above can be independently controlled by the mechanism according to this modification, and the above-described scan control can be performed.

 このように、上述した実施形態及びその変形例に係るパノラマ撮影装置1によれば、X線管23と検出器24が別々の円形軌道上を独立して動く中で、常に正対状態なるように4軸(即ちX線管23の部分的な公転、自転、及び検出器24の部分的な公転、自転)の姿勢制御が行われる。このため、装置の小型化を図ることができるとともに、X線パスの軌道設計の自由度は極めて高い。しかも、X線パスの軌道を任意に決めて思惑通りの画像が撮像できるようにする。 As described above, according to the panoramic imaging apparatus 1 according to the above-described embodiment and the modification thereof, the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 are always facing each other while moving independently on different circular orbits. In addition, attitude control of four axes (that is, partial revolution and rotation of the X-ray tube 23 and partial revolution and rotation of the detector 24) is performed. For this reason, the apparatus can be miniaturized and the degree of freedom in designing the X-ray path is extremely high. Moreover, the trajectory of the X-ray path is arbitrarily determined so that a desired image can be taken.

 具体的には、1つの回転中心Oを通る同一の中心軸CAの周りに、その中心軸CAからの距離(径)が異なる円状の2つの軌道に沿って、X線管23と検出器24を互いに独立して回動(公転)させる。その上で、X線管23及び検出器24がそれぞれの回転位置において、回転軸CAに平行な第1及び第2の軸AXs、AXdの周りに回動(自転、又は首振り)させることができる。つまり、X線管23及び検出器24は共にそれぞれが自転(姿勢制御)可能であるので、両者は常に正対した状態を維持できる。これにより、X線管23及び検出器24がそれぞれの円軌道上を回転するという比較的簡単で小型化が可能な構成でありながら、スキャン中には、X線管23から検出器24に向かうファンビーム状のX線のパスを、撮影空間Sに多様な角度から描かせることができ、また容易に変更できる。このため、撮影空間Sに多様な焦点面を設定することができる。 Specifically, the X-ray tube 23 and the detector are arranged around two identical orbits around the same central axis CA passing through one rotation center O and having different distances (diameters) from the central axis CA. 24 are rotated (revolved) independently of each other. In addition, the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 are rotated (rotated or swung) around the first and second axes AXs and AXd parallel to the rotation axis CA at the respective rotation positions. it can. That is, since both the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 can rotate (attitude control), they can always maintain a state of facing each other. Thus, the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 are relatively simple and can be reduced in size by rotating on their respective circular orbits. The fan beam-shaped X-ray path can be drawn from various angles in the imaging space S and can be easily changed. For this reason, various focal planes can be set in the imaging space S.

 加えて、中心軸CAからX線管23及び検出器24までの距離が異なる。つまり、検出器24を被検者Pの撮影部位JWになるべく接近した位置で回転させることができる。これにより、X線管23の焦点サイズ(本実施形態では0.15mm)が同じあれば、検出器24が被検者Pに接近するほど拡大率が上がり、分解能が上がる分、検出器24の検出精度も向上する。 In addition, the distance from the central axis CA to the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 is different. That is, the detector 24 can be rotated at a position as close as possible to the imaging region JW of the subject P. As a result, if the focal spot size (0.15 mm in this embodiment) of the X-ray tube 23 is the same, the magnification rate increases and the resolution increases as the detector 24 approaches the subject P. Detection accuracy is also improved.

 このように本パノラマ撮影装置1では、X線管23から照射されるX線XBは常に検出器24のX線入射窓WDの大きさに絞られている。しかも、X線管23と検出器24は4軸独立で駆動制御され、且つ、スキャン中、両者は常に被検者Pの顎部を介して対向している。このため、X線管から照射されるX線XBは検出器24に入射する。したがって、撮影空間Sから漏れ出る散乱線の量は少ない。特に、矩形状の開口を持つファンビーム状に絞られたX線が中心軸CAの周りに回転するため、撮影空間Sの前後方向に漏れる散乱線の量は更に少ない。 As described above, in the panoramic imaging apparatus 1, the X-ray XB irradiated from the X-ray tube 23 is always limited to the size of the X-ray incident window WD of the detector 24. In addition, the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 are driven and controlled independently by the four axes, and both are always opposed to each other via the jaw of the subject P during scanning. For this reason, the X-ray XB irradiated from the X-ray tube enters the detector 24. Therefore, the amount of scattered radiation leaking from the imaging space S is small. In particular, since X-rays focused in a fan beam shape having a rectangular opening rotate around the central axis CA, the amount of scattered radiation leaking in the front-rear direction of the imaging space S is further reduced.

 特に、図15及び図16にて説明した回転駆動機構を備えたパノラマ撮影装置の場合、ベース部BSからタワー部TWを立設し、そのタワー部TWの上部に、公転運動をさせる2つの電動モータ145、146を設けた。このため、これらの駆動源をベース部BSに配置する構造に比べて、回転伝達ベルトの引き回しが簡素化される。 In particular, in the case of the panoramic photographing apparatus provided with the rotation drive mechanism described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16, two electric motors that make a tower portion TW stand up from the base portion BS and perform a revolving motion on the upper portion of the tower portion TW. Motors 145 and 146 were provided. For this reason, compared with the structure which arrange | positions these drive sources in base part BS, the routing of a rotation transmission belt is simplified.

 さらに、この変形例では、図9に示すコンソール15の回路を実装する制御基板(図示せず)は、タワー部TWの上面のスペースUSに配置するようにしている。このため、ベース部BSを成す電源ボックス13には、交流100Vから直流24Vの電圧変換するコンバータだけを搭載し、その直流出力を制御基板や電動モータに送るケーブルだけを引き回せばよい。このため、かかる制御基板を電源ボックス13に置く場合に比べて、配線の引き回しも簡素になる。 Furthermore, in this modification, a control board (not shown) on which the circuit of the console 15 shown in FIG. 9 is mounted is arranged in the space US on the upper surface of the tower unit TW. For this reason, the power supply box 13 that forms the base portion BS is equipped with only a converter that converts the voltage from AC 100V to DC 24V, and only a cable that sends the DC output to the control board or the electric motor is routed. For this reason, compared with the case where this control board is placed in the power supply box 13, wiring is also simplified.

 さらに、X線管アーム21及び検出器アーム22を中心軸CAの周りに回転させる際、これらのアームの反対側、すなわち、回転駆動機構147の背面側にはカウンターウェイトを設けてはいない。これらのアーム21、22の回転は速度パターンに沿って精密に制御することによって制御している。通常、このようなアームを、その回転径方向が高さ方向であるように回転させる場合、その重力に起因した回転ムラを抑制するカウンターウェイトを設けることが多い。しかし、本変形例ではカウンターウェイトを設けていないので、その分、構造が簡単になり、また軽量化される。 Furthermore, when the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22 are rotated around the central axis CA, no counterweight is provided on the opposite side of these arms, that is, on the back side of the rotation drive mechanism 147. The rotation of these arms 21 and 22 is controlled by precisely controlling along the speed pattern. Usually, when such an arm is rotated so that its rotational radial direction is the height direction, a counterweight is often provided to suppress rotational unevenness due to the gravity. However, since the counterweight is not provided in this modification, the structure is simplified and the weight is reduced accordingly.

 [第2の変形例]
 さらに、上述した実施形態に係るパノラマ撮影装置1に搭載可能な散乱線遮蔽カバー14Cに係る変形例を説明する。
[Second modification]
Furthermore, a modified example related to the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C that can be mounted on the panorama photographing apparatus 1 according to the above-described embodiment will be described.

 このカバー14Cに形成する透光体部分14TRは、前述した図5の形状に代えて、図17に示すように、両側面に設ける適宜な矩形状の透光体窓14TR´としてもよい。この透光体窓14TR´、鉛を含有した樹脂材料で形成するが、これ以外の非透光体部分14NTは金属性の板材で形成している。これによっても散乱線遮蔽の効果は期待でき、且つ、鉛含有の部分を減らすことで全体の重量を軽減させることができる。 The translucent portion 14TR formed on the cover 14C may be an appropriate rectangular translucent window 14TR ′ provided on both side surfaces as shown in FIG. 17 instead of the shape of FIG. 5 described above. The translucent window 14TR ′ is formed of a resin material containing lead, and the other non-translucent portion 14NT is formed of a metallic plate material. Also by this, the effect of shielding the scattered radiation can be expected, and the entire weight can be reduced by reducing the lead-containing portion.

 この透光体窓14TR´は、スキャンに歯科医が患者の様子を観察できることが第一であり、閉所が苦手な患者の不快感軽減ができれば尚良い。このため、透光体窓14TR´の形状は矩形に限定されず、スリット状、円形、三角形でもよい。さらに、この透光体窓14TR´は、カバー14Cの一方の側面だけに設けもよい。透光体窓14TR´の高さ方向の位置は、通常、立位でスキャン操作を行う歯科医が中の患者の頭部を透光体窓14TR´を通して観察可能に設定される。
 
 [第2の実施形態]
 次に、図18~図23を参照して、本発明に係るX線撮影装置としてのX線パノラマ撮影装置の第2の実施形態を説明する。
This translucent window 14TR ′ is primarily capable of observing the state of the patient by the dentist during scanning, and it is better if the discomfort of the patient who is not good at closing can be reduced. For this reason, the shape of the translucent window 14TR ′ is not limited to a rectangle, but may be a slit, a circle, or a triangle. Further, the translucent window 14TR ′ may be provided only on one side surface of the cover 14C. The position in the height direction of the translucent window 14TR ′ is usually set so that a dentist who performs a scanning operation in a standing position can observe the head of the patient inside through the translucent window 14TR ′.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment of an X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus as an X-ray imaging apparatus according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

 なお、この第2の実施形態及びこれ以降の実施形態において、前述した第1の実施形態及びその変形例(第1の変形例)と同一又は同等の作用を成す構成要素には同一符号を用いて、それらの説明を省略又は簡略化する。 In the second embodiment and the subsequent embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for components that have the same or equivalent functions as those of the first embodiment and its modification (first modification) described above. Thus, the description thereof is omitted or simplified.

 この第2の実施形態に係るX線パノラマ撮影装置は、第1の実施形態で概説したティーチング機能をより具体的にした構成を備える。このティーチング機能は、第1の実施形態に係るX線パノラマ装置の構成に加えて、即ち、3D基準断層面の軌跡である歯列TR上の標準軌道SSに沿った標準撮影法及び直交撮影法に加えて、又は、単独で実施することができる。 The X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus according to the second embodiment has a more specific configuration of the teaching function outlined in the first embodiment. In addition to the configuration of the X-ray panorama apparatus according to the first embodiment, this teaching function includes a standard imaging method and an orthogonal imaging method along the standard trajectory SS on the dentition TR that is the trajectory of the 3D reference tomographic plane. In addition to or can be carried out alone.

 そこで、図19~図24を参照して、このパノラマ撮影装置1に機能的に一体に搭載されているティーチング装置を説明する。 Therefore, with reference to FIG. 19 to FIG. 24, a teaching device that is functionally integrated with the panoramic photographing apparatus 1 will be described.

 最初に、このティーチング装置が目指しているデンタルレントゲンと呼ばれる従来の撮影法を図13に基づき説明する。図13には、被検者の口内にフィルムFMを挿入し、これに外からX線を照射するときの幾何学的な関係が示されている。口内には、22×35mm程度の小児用のものから31×41mm程度の大人用のものまで幾つかの種類のサイズのフィルムFMが挿入される。このフィルムFMは目的歯が写る位置に置かれ、これを指等で抑えた状態で撮影される。この撮影に際し、歯科医は外部のX線照射機のコーンCNの方向を調整しながら、撮影時のX線照射角度をイメージする。つまり、目的歯を撮影するための最適なX線入射角を模擬的に確認する。勿論、SID(X線焦点とフィルムとの間の距離)は約300~400mm、確保される。 First, a conventional imaging method called dental x-ray aimed at by this teaching apparatus will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 shows the geometrical relationship when the film FM is inserted into the subject's mouth and irradiated with X-rays from the outside. Several types of film FM are inserted into the mouth, from those for children of about 22 × 35 mm to those for adults of about 31 × 41 mm. This film FM is placed at a position where the target teeth are photographed, and is photographed in a state where it is held with a finger or the like. In this imaging, the dentist images the X-ray irradiation angle at the time of imaging while adjusting the direction of the cone CN of the external X-ray irradiator. That is, the optimum X-ray incident angle for photographing the target tooth is confirmed in a simulated manner. Of course, the SID (distance between the X-ray focal point and the film) is secured to about 300 to 400 mm.

 しかし、このデンタルレントゲンは患者にとっても歯科医にとっても面倒で手間の掛かる撮影法である。患者は自分の口内に入れたフィルムFMを自分の指等で押えている必要があり、歯科医も最適なX線照射角度を想定しながらコーンCNの角度を調整しなければならない。X線被ばくの観点からなるべく撮り直しは避けたいので、コーンCNの角度調整に時間が掛かり、作業性も良くないばかりか、撮影されたフィルム写真が目的歯を最適に捉えているかどうかは撮影結果を見ないと判らない。 However, this dental X-ray is a troublesome and time-consuming method for both patients and dentists. The patient needs to press the film FM placed in his / her mouth with his / her finger or the like, and the dentist must adjust the angle of the cone CN while assuming an optimum X-ray irradiation angle. I want to avoid re-taking as much as possible from the viewpoint of X-ray exposure, so it takes time to adjust the angle of the cone CN and the workability is not good, and whether the film photograph taken captures the target teeth optimally I can't understand without seeing.

 このような背景から、本実施形態に係るパノラマ撮影装置1は、このデンタルレントゲンの撮影機能を前述した4軸独立制御をベースに達成しよとするものである。このときに必要となるのがティーチング機能である。 From such a background, the panoramic imaging apparatus 1 according to the present embodiment intends to achieve this dental X-ray imaging function based on the above-described 4-axis independent control. What is needed at this time is a teaching function.

 この本実施形態に係る精密撮影を、図14を参照して説明する。同図に示すように、例えば右奥歯2番目が目的歯であるとすると、この奥歯を含む領域50mm(25mm+25mm)が撮影範囲となる。勿論、実際の撮影画像は50×50mm程度の矩形状である。そのために、右頬の外側に検出器24が位置して、その反対側の左側頬の外側にX線管23が位置する。さらに、検出器24の横幅方向の画素数は少なく、実質的に縦長のラインセンサと見做されるので、前述した2つの軌道Tx、Tdに沿いながらもX線管23及び検出器24を擬似的に互いに反対方向に平行移動させる。この平行移動の間に検出器24から出力されるフレームデータをトモシンセシス法で合成して、50×50mm程度の精密撮影画像が得られる。この部分撮影画像は従来のデンタルレントゲンにより得られる画像にとって代わるものである。 The precision photographing according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, for example, if the second right back tooth is the target tooth, a region 50 mm (25 mm + 25 mm) including this back tooth is the imaging range. Of course, the actual captured image has a rectangular shape of about 50 × 50 mm. Therefore, the detector 24 is located outside the right cheek, and the X-ray tube 23 is located outside the left cheek on the opposite side. Further, since the detector 24 has a small number of pixels in the horizontal width direction and is regarded as a substantially vertical line sensor, the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 are simulated while being along the two trajectories Tx and Td. Are translated in opposite directions. Frame data output from the detector 24 during this parallel movement is synthesized by the tomosynthesis method, and a precision photographed image of about 50 × 50 mm is obtained. This partially photographed image replaces an image obtained by a conventional dental X-ray.

 この精密撮影時には、図15に示すように、前述したティーチングアーム25を用いて事前に目的歯に対して最適なX線照射角度のティーチングを行う。歯科医は、このティーチングを介して、目的歯を透過するX線照射角度を模擬的に確認しながら、撮影時のX線照射角度を設定することができる。なお、図15ではX線管アーム21、検出器アーム22の図示を省略した説明図にしている。 At the time of this precision photographing, as shown in FIG. 15, teaching of the optimum X-ray irradiation angle is performed on the target tooth in advance using the teaching arm 25 described above. The dentist can set the X-ray irradiation angle at the time of imaging while simulating the X-ray irradiation angle passing through the target tooth through this teaching. In FIG. 15, the illustration of the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22 is omitted.

 具体的には、図15に示すように、ティーチングアーム25は、L字形で略丸棒状を成し、その基部が回動機構170に固定されている。このため、このティーチングアーム25を被検者Pの顔の周りに回転(回動)させることができる(図中の矢印F1参照)。この回動機構170にはエンコーダ171が併設されており、ティーチングアーム25全体の回動角度(以下、アーム回転角θ1と呼ぶ)を検出し、その検出信号がコンソール15のコントローラ133のCPUに出力される。 Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, the teaching arm 25 is L-shaped and has a substantially round bar shape, and its base is fixed to the rotation mechanism 170. For this reason, this teaching arm 25 can be rotated (rotated) around the face of the subject P (see arrow F1 in the figure). The rotation mechanism 170 is provided with an encoder 171, detects the rotation angle of the entire teaching arm 25 (hereinafter referred to as the arm rotation angle θ1), and outputs a detection signal to the CPU of the controller 133 of the console 15. Is done.

 さらに、このティーチングアーム25は、その全体がL字状に形成された棒状のアームであり、基部側アーム部25Aと先端側アーム部25Bとを備える。基部側アーム部25AはZ軸方向の一部まで伸び、このアーム部の端部に、先端側アーム部25Bが回動可能に連結されている。先端側アーム部25BはZ軸方向に延び、その先端側の端部が被検者Pの顎部JWの上まで到達している。 Further, the teaching arm 25 is a rod-like arm that is formed in an L shape as a whole, and includes a base side arm portion 25A and a tip side arm portion 25B. The base side arm portion 25A extends to a part in the Z-axis direction, and the distal end side arm portion 25B is rotatably connected to the end portion of the arm portion. The distal end side arm portion 25B extends in the Z-axis direction, and the end portion on the distal end side reaches above the jaw portion JW of the subject P.

 基部側アーム部25Aの先端部には、この先端部に先端側アーム部25Bを回動可能に支持する回動機構172と、これに併設されたエンコーダ173が内蔵されている。このため、先端側アーム部25Bを捻ると、その基部側アーム部25Aに対して回転(回動)させることができる。この回転量もエンコーダ173により検出され、その検出信号がコントローラ133のCPUに送られる。 The distal end portion of the base side arm portion 25A incorporates a rotation mechanism 172 that rotatably supports the distal end side arm portion 25B at the distal end portion, and an encoder 173 provided therewith. For this reason, when the front end side arm portion 25B is twisted, it can be rotated (turned) with respect to the base side arm portion 25A. This amount of rotation is also detected by the encoder 173, and the detection signal is sent to the CPU of the controller 133.

 加えて、この先端側アーム部25Bの更に先端側の所定位置に、小型のレーザ発振器181と、押しボタンスイッチ182とが設けられている。レーザ発振器181は、アーム先端側の側面からレーザビームLBを被検者Pの歯列TRに向けて照射できる。押しボタンスイッチ182は先端側アーム部25Bの先端に設けられ、歯科医が押すことができる。このスイッチ信号はコントローラ133のCPUに送られる。 In addition, a small laser oscillator 181 and a push button switch 182 are provided at predetermined positions on the distal end side of the distal end side arm portion 25B. The laser oscillator 181 can irradiate a laser beam LB toward the dentition TR of the subject P from the side surface on the distal end side of the arm. The push button switch 182 is provided at the distal end of the distal arm portion 25B and can be pressed by a dentist. This switch signal is sent to the CPU of the controller 133.

 歯科医は、このティーチングアーム25の先端側アーム部25Bを把持して、それを回動させることで、歯列TRの所望位置にビームを照射し、その位置を確認できる。さらに、先端側アーム部25Bを捻って(回転させて)、レーザビームの照射角度を変更することできる。これにより、ティーチングアーム25の同じ回転位置であっても、先端側アーム部25Bの捻り角度を変えることで、レーザビームLBの入射角度、即ち、実際に照射されるX線ビームXBの照射角度(即ち、首振り角度θ2)を変更することできる(図16参照)。 The dentist can grasp the distal end side arm portion 25B of the teaching arm 25 and rotate it to irradiate the beam to a desired position of the dentition TR and confirm the position. Further, the irradiation angle of the laser beam can be changed by twisting (rotating) the distal end side arm portion 25B. Thus, even at the same rotational position of the teaching arm 25, the incident angle of the laser beam LB, that is, the irradiation angle of the actually irradiated X-ray beam XB (by changing the twist angle of the distal arm portion 25B) That is, the swing angle θ2) can be changed (see FIG. 16).

 なお、レーザ発振器181のレーザ発振点PTは、前述したX線管23のX線焦点FPと同じ円形軌道を回動できるように構成されている。このため、レーザ発振器181から出射されるレーザビームLBが、実際の撮影時のX線ビームXBを模擬できる。このため、ティーチングのときには、X線管アーム21及び検出器アーム22はそれらの待機位置に位置決めされており、歯科医の手動によるティーチング動作を邪魔しないようになっている。この退避位置は、ティーチングの範囲外である、被検者Pの頭部の斜め下それぞれの位置に設定されている。 The laser oscillation point PT of the laser oscillator 181 is configured to be able to rotate on the same circular orbit as the X-ray focal point FP of the X-ray tube 23 described above. For this reason, the laser beam LB emitted from the laser oscillator 181 can simulate the X-ray beam XB at the time of actual imaging. For this reason, at the time of teaching, the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22 are positioned at their standby positions so as not to disturb the manual teaching operation of the dentist. This retracted position is set to a position obliquely below the head of the subject P that is outside the teaching range.

 次に、コントローラ133の(実際には、CPU)で実行されるティーチングに関わる処理を説明する。 Next, processing related to teaching executed by the controller 133 (actually the CPU) will be described.

 コントローラ133は、図17に示すように、初期化後(ステップS11)、まず、両エンコーダ171、173からその出力信号の読み込みを試み、アーム回転角θ1が入力したか否かを判断する(ステップS12、S13)。歯科医が所望のアーム回転角θ1及び首振り角度θ2を決め、押しボタンスイッチ182を押す。これに応じて、コントローラ133はそのアーム回転角θ1、θ2が決定したと見做すことできる(ステップS14、YES)。この判断がNOの場合、歯科医まだアーム回転角θ1を決めるために試行錯誤している段階であるので、処理はステップS2に戻り、ステップS12~S14の処理を繰り返しながら待機する。 As shown in FIG. 17, after initialization (step S11), the controller 133 first attempts to read the output signals from both encoders 171 and 173, and determines whether or not the arm rotation angle θ1 has been input (step). S12, S13). The dentist determines the desired arm rotation angle θ1 and swing angle θ2, and presses the push button switch 182. In response to this, the controller 133 can assume that the arm rotation angles θ1 and θ2 have been determined (step S14, YES). If this determination is NO, since the dentist is still in a trial and error stage to determine the arm rotation angle θ1, the process returns to step S2 and waits while repeating the processes of steps S12 to S14.

 次いで、コントローラ133は、ステップ15に移行して模擬的に決めたアーム回転角θ1及び首振り角度θ2を表示器136(又は手元においたポータブルモニタ)に表示する。歯科医が、その表示結果に同意しない場合、その処理はステップS12に戻され、アーム回転角θ1及び首振り角度θ2が再度、設定し直される(ステップS16、NO)。 Next, the controller 133 proceeds to Step 15 and displays the arm rotation angle θ1 and the swing angle θ2 determined in a simulated manner on the display 136 (or a portable monitor at hand). If the dentist does not agree with the display result, the process returns to step S12, and the arm rotation angle θ1 and the swing angle θ2 are set again (NO in step S16).

 これに対して、歯科医が設定した角度θ1及びθ2に同意すると(ステップS16、YES)、それらの角度θ1、θ2に基づくX線管23及び検出器24の反対方向の平行移動のための速度パターンが制御データとして演算される(ステップS17)。この演算された制御データは、例えば第1の記憶部134に送られ記憶される(ステップS18)。 On the other hand, if the angles θ1 and θ2 set by the dentist are agreed (step S16, YES), the speed for translation in the opposite direction of the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 based on the angles θ1 and θ2 A pattern is calculated as control data (step S17). The calculated control data is sent to and stored in, for example, the first storage unit 134 (step S18).

 ここで、上記ステップS17で実行される速度パターン(制御データ)の演算のアルゴリズムを、図18を参照して説明する。同図において、いま歯列TRのうちの歯番3が目的歯であるとする。 Here, the algorithm for calculating the speed pattern (control data) executed in step S17 will be described with reference to FIG. In the figure, it is assumed that the tooth number 3 in the tooth row TR is the target tooth.

 ・まず、歯番3の位置の斜線におけるX線管焦点と検出器表面とを結ぶ線の中点と、その斜線と歯列楕円TRとの交点を演算する。この交点は2点求められるが、検出器24に近い方の交点を採用する。ここで、斜線はレーザビームで模擬したアーム回転角θ1における首振り角度θ2のラインを示す。検出器24は常に被検者の正面を移動するものとする。 First, the midpoint of the line connecting the X-ray tube focal point and the detector surface at the oblique line at the position of the tooth number 3 and the intersection of the oblique line and the dentition ellipse TR are calculated. Although two intersection points are obtained, the intersection point closer to the detector 24 is adopted. Here, the slanted line indicates a line of the swing angle θ2 at the arm rotation angle θ1 simulated by the laser beam. The detector 24 always moves in front of the subject.

 ・この交点を通り斜線と直交する線を引き、その垂直線上の交点から前後に25mmの2点を演算する。 ・ Draw a line that passes through this intersection and is perpendicular to the diagonal line, and calculate two points of 25mm forward and backward from the intersection on the vertical line.

 ・次いで、この2点と中点を通る直線を2本作成する。 ・ Next, create two straight lines that pass through these two points and the midpoint.

 ・この2本のラインとX線管23及び検出器24の軌道円Ts、Tdとの交点をそれぞれ演算する。 · Intersection points between these two lines and the orbital circles Ts and Td of the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 are respectively calculated.

 ・X線管23及び検出器24が互いに対向するように、それぞれの開始位置(アーム角度及び首振り角度)を決める。 · The respective start positions (arm angle and swing angle) are determined so that the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 face each other.

 ・X線管23及び検出器24の軌道円Ts、Td上の撮影軌道制御中の位置は、開始位置からティーチング位置までの範囲、及び、そのティーチング位置から終了位置までの範囲をそれぞれ10分割した位置をX線管23及び検出器24の双方に対して演算し、それぞれの位置でX線管23及び検出器24が互いに正対した状態になるように前述した速度パターンを演算する。 The X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 on the orbital circles Ts and Td during imaging trajectory control are divided into a range from the start position to the teaching position and a range from the teaching position to the end position, respectively. The position is calculated for both the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24, and the above-described velocity pattern is calculated so that the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 face each other at the respective positions.

 このように設定されたX線管23及び検出器24の4軸独立制御の速度パターンは制御データとして出力される。 The speed pattern of the 4-axis independent control of the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 set in this way is output as control data.

 なお、本実施形態においては、コントローラ133の処理、第1の記憶部134、回動機構170、172、エンコーダ171、173、レーザ発振器181、及び押しボタンスイッチ182を主要部としてティーチング装置が構成されており、パノラマ撮影装置1に一体に組み込まれている。本実施形態の場合、ティーチング装置がパノラマ撮影装置1に一体に組込まれていることで、ティーチングした制御データをそのままパノラマ撮影装置1が使用できる点で有利である。 In the present embodiment, the teaching device is configured with the processing of the controller 133, the first storage unit 134, the rotation mechanisms 170 and 172, the encoders 171 and 173, the laser oscillator 181 and the push button switch 182 as main parts. And integrated into the panoramic photographing apparatus 1. In the case of the present embodiment, since the teaching device is integrated in the panoramic photographing device 1, it is advantageous in that the panoramic photographing device 1 can use the teaching control data as it is.

 本実施形態に係るパノラマ撮影装置1の使用するときには、まず、このパノラマ撮影装置1を歯科用治療椅子2の後ろ側の所定位置に位置付け、床面に固定する。このときに、前述した操作レバー52を操作してピン50を押し下げ、そのピン50をフロア固定部53に係合させる。これにより、パノラマ撮影装置1の本体BDの歯科用治療椅子2に対する位置付け及び固定が達成される。 When using the panoramic photographing apparatus 1 according to the present embodiment, first, the panoramic photographing apparatus 1 is positioned at a predetermined position on the back side of the dental treatment chair 2 and fixed to the floor surface. At this time, the operation lever 52 described above is operated to push the pin 50 down, and the pin 50 is engaged with the floor fixing portion 53. Thereby, positioning and fixation with respect to the dental treatment chair 2 of the main body BD of the panoramic imaging apparatus 1 are achieved.

 次いで、散乱線遮蔽カバー14Cを後ろ側に退避させる(図3の仮想線「退避位置」参照)。この段階では、X線管アーム21及び検出器アーム22はそれぞれの初期位置に位置付けられている。そこで、歯科医は、歯科用治療椅子2の背もたれを倒しながら、患者Pの頭部Hを撮影空間Sの所定位置に位置決めする。この位置決めは昇降機14の高さ方向の調節、及び、図示しない3本のレーザビームによる正中線、フランクフルト、犬歯の位置決めにより行われる。 Next, the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C is retracted to the rear side (see the imaginary line “retraction position” in FIG. 3). At this stage, the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22 are positioned at their initial positions. Therefore, the dentist positions the head H of the patient P at a predetermined position in the imaging space S while tilting the backrest of the dental treatment chair 2. This positioning is performed by adjusting the height direction of the elevator 14 and positioning the midline, Frankfurt, and canine by three laser beams (not shown).

 位置決め後、散乱線遮蔽カバー14Cを前方向の撮影位置まで移動させる(図3の実線「撮影位置」参照)。これにより、図3の実線で示すように、画成された撮影空間Sに被検者Pの頭部Hが位置した状態になる。この状態で、歯科医は少し離れた位置から照射スイッチ56を押すことで、前述したパノラマ撮影が起動し、前述した4軸独立制御に係るフレームデータの収集が行われる。 After the positioning, the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C is moved to the imaging position in the forward direction (see the solid line “imaging position” in FIG. 3). As a result, as shown by the solid line in FIG. 3, the head H of the subject P is positioned in the defined imaging space S. In this state, the dentist presses the irradiation switch 56 from a slightly separated position, whereby the panoramic imaging described above is activated and the frame data related to the above-described four-axis independent control is collected.

 次に、必要に応じて、精密撮影を説明する。この場合、上述したと同様に被検者Pの頭部Hを撮影空間Sに位置付けした後(散乱線遮蔽カバー14Cは空いており、さらにX線管アーム21及び検出器アーム22が退避している状態)、前述したティーチングを行って、所望の撮像範囲を精密撮影するための制御データを設定する。その後、散乱線遮蔽カバー14Cを閉じて同様に装置1を稼働させる。 Next, precision photography will be explained as necessary. In this case, after the head H of the subject P is positioned in the imaging space S as described above (the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C is empty, and the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22 are retracted). In this state, the above-described teaching is performed to set control data for precisely photographing a desired imaging range. Thereafter, the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C is closed and the apparatus 1 is operated in the same manner.

 この場合、制御データとして設定されている速度パターンはX線管23、検出器24それぞれの軌道Tx、Tdのうちの一部の指定範囲において、互いに、両者が正対した状態でスキャンをする姿勢制御データである。このため、スキャン中に、それら指定範囲においてのみ、X線照射が実行され、部分的な指定範囲でのデータ収集が実行される。この収集したフレームデータを、トモシンセシス法を用いて合成して、従来のデンタルレントゲンと同様の精密撮影画像を得る。したがって、従来のデンタルレントゲンを使用するときの患者、歯科医双方の不快さ、不便さを解消できる。 In this case, the velocity pattern set as the control data is an attitude in which scanning is performed in a state in which the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24 face each other in some specified ranges of the trajectories Tx and Td of the detector 24, respectively. Control data. For this reason, during scanning, X-ray irradiation is executed only in those designated ranges, and data collection in a partial designated range is executed. The collected frame data is synthesized using the tomosynthesis method to obtain a precision photographed image similar to a conventional dental X-ray. Therefore, the discomfort and inconvenience of both the patient and the dentist when using the conventional dental X-ray can be solved.

 このように本実施形態によれば、数歯を狙った部分X線撮影ができるようになる。そのために、撮影範囲の中心位置を指定し、かつ、その領域における歯同士の重なりを極力排除したX線ビームの入射方向を指定する。中心位置を指定することで歯列の撮影範囲を予め定めた長さから決めることができる。このX線撮影の範囲及びX線ビームの入射角の指令値を、実際のスキャン前に予めレーザビームで模擬して、それらの指令値(制御データ)を的確に設定できる。この指令値は実際のX線撮影に反映される。この結果、画像の精度を向上し、精密撮影のやり直しを極力防止でき、X線被ばく量の低減、患者の苦痛および負担軽減、操作者の労力軽減、患者スループットの向上に寄与できる。 Thus, according to the present embodiment, partial X-ray imaging aiming at several teeth can be performed. For this purpose, the center position of the imaging range is designated, and the incident direction of the X-ray beam in which the overlapping of teeth in the region is eliminated as much as possible is designated. By specifying the center position, the imaging range of the dentition can be determined from a predetermined length. The command values for the X-ray imaging range and the incident angle of the X-ray beam can be simulated in advance with a laser beam before actual scanning, and the command values (control data) can be set accurately. This command value is reflected in actual X-ray imaging. As a result, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the image and prevent re-taking of precision imaging as much as possible, and to contribute to the reduction of the X-ray exposure amount, the patient's pain and burden, the operator's labor, and the patient throughput.

 [第3の変形例]
 続いて、図25を参照して、上述した第2の実施形態に係るティーチングの1つの変形例を第3の変形例として説明する。
[Third Modification]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, one modification of teaching according to the second embodiment described above will be described as a third modification.

 この第3の変形例に係るティーチングは、必ずしもティーチングアーム25を使用しなくてもよい簡便的な手法である。この手法は、図10に示すように、被検体Pの歯列TRが標準軌道SSを描くものと仮定すれば、その歯列TRを成す各歯(目的歯)の、周方向における回転角θの位置は決まっている。そこで、目的歯毎に前述した図18のアルゴリズムに基づいて予め速度パターンを演算して記憶しておくことができる。この場合、標準軌道SSに沿って並ぶ上顎、下顎の歯毎に、その対応する回転角θを決め、その歯に例えば直交する方向を決めて、その角度及び方向から速度パターンを演算するものである。つまり、歯毎にその歯を中心に50×50mm程度の領域を部分的にスキャンできるようにする。この歯の番号と速度パターンとを対応付けたテーブルを例えば第1の記憶部134に保持させておけばよい。1組の速度パターンは、前述したように、X線管23及び検出器24の公転、自転で4つの速度パターンから成る。さらに、歯の番号、各歯への複数のX線入射角、及び、各歯及び各X線入射角に対応した複数組の速度パターンを用意しておいてもよい。 The teaching according to the third modification is a simple method that does not necessarily require the teaching arm 25 to be used. In this method, as shown in FIG. 10, assuming that the dentition TR of the subject P draws a standard trajectory SS, the rotation angle θ in the circumferential direction of each tooth (target tooth) constituting the dentition TR is shown. The position of is fixed. Therefore, a speed pattern can be calculated and stored in advance based on the algorithm of FIG. 18 described above for each target tooth. In this case, for each of the maxillary and mandibular teeth arranged along the standard trajectory SS, the corresponding rotation angle θ is determined, the direction orthogonal to the teeth is determined, for example, and the speed pattern is calculated from the angle and direction. is there. That is, for each tooth, an area of about 50 × 50 mm around the tooth can be partially scanned. A table in which the tooth number and the speed pattern are associated with each other may be stored in the first storage unit 134, for example. As described above, one set of velocity patterns is composed of four velocity patterns by revolution and rotation of the X-ray tube 23 and the detector 24. Furthermore, tooth numbers, a plurality of X-ray incident angles on each tooth, and a plurality of sets of velocity patterns corresponding to each tooth and each X-ray incident angle may be prepared.

 図25には、実際に演算した、大人用の部分撮影のための速度パターンの組を例示する。同図(A)には、「左、下顎、3番」の歯に対するX線管23の回転(公転の一部)の速度パターン(曲線A)、検出器24の回転(公転の一部)の速度パターン(曲線B)、X線管23の自転の速度パターン(曲線A´)、及び検出器24のX線管23の速度パターン(部分的な回転を示す曲線B´)を示す。同図(B)には、「左、下顎、7番」の歯に対する同様の速度パターンの組を示す。 FIG. 25 illustrates a set of speed patterns for partial shooting for adults that are actually calculated. In FIG. 4A, the speed pattern (curve A) of rotation (part of revolution) of the X-ray tube 23 with respect to the teeth of “left, lower jaw, third”, rotation of the detector 24 (part of revolution). 2 shows a speed pattern (curve B ′), a rotational speed pattern (curve A ′) of the X-ray tube 23, and a speed pattern (curve B ′ showing partial rotation) of the X-ray tube 23 of the detector 24. FIG. 4B shows a set of similar speed patterns for the “left, lower jaw, and number 7” teeth.

 上述の速度パターンのデータは、部分撮影のときに歯科医が診断したい目的歯を表示器136のGUI画面上で指定するだけでよい。例えば、前述した図24のステップS3において「左、下顎、3番」の歯と指定すれば、コントローラ133は図25(A)に示す1組の動作パターンを第1の記憶部134から読み出し、前述した図24に示す手順にしたがって目的歯の部分撮影を行うことができる。この部分撮影、つまり、目的歯を中心とする部分的な領域をスキャン(部分スキャン)し、これにより収集されたフレームデータをシフト&アッド量の所定のプロファイルにより再構成すればよい。これにより、従来のデンタルレントゲンと同様の部分撮影画像を得ることができる。 The above-mentioned speed pattern data only needs to designate on the GUI screen of the display 136 the target tooth that the dentist wants to diagnose at the time of partial imaging. For example, if the “left, lower jaw, third” tooth is designated in step S3 of FIG. 24 described above, the controller 133 reads a set of operation patterns shown in FIG. 25A from the first storage unit 134, The partial imaging of the target tooth can be performed according to the procedure shown in FIG. This partial imaging, that is, a partial area centered on the target tooth may be scanned (partial scan), and the frame data collected thereby may be reconstructed with a predetermined profile of the shift and add amount. Thereby, a partial captured image similar to that of a conventional dental X-ray can be obtained.

 したがって、この第3の変形例によって、簡便的ではあるが、目的歯だけを指定することで部分撮影画像が得られるので、歯科医の労力が軽減するとともに、X線被ばくも少なくなる。このような簡便的な部分撮影を採用できる理由は、患者の歯列は、勿論、個人差があるものの、標準軌道SSに沿っていることが多いからである。 Therefore, according to the third modified example, although it is simple, a partial captured image can be obtained by designating only the target tooth, so that the labor of the dentist is reduced and the X-ray exposure is reduced. The reason why such a simple partial photographing can be adopted is that the patient's dentition is often along the standard trajectory SS although there are individual differences.

 前述した各実施形態、及び、その各変形例によれば、前述した以外に様々な作用効果をもたらす。第1に、撮影空間Sを画成する上面、両側面、及び、底面の4面は、前述した散乱線遮蔽カバー14C及び底面部14Cの散乱線遮蔽板20により囲まれ、X線遮蔽がなされている。このため、パノラマ撮影又は部分撮影時において撮影空間Sから外部に漏れるX線を確実に減少させ、又は、遮蔽することができる。これにより、X線管23が駆動するパノラマ撮影や部分撮影が行われても、撮影空間Sの外側に与えるX線の影響を殆ど無視できるようになる。 According to each of the above-described embodiments and their modifications, various effects other than those described above are brought about. First, the top surface, both side surfaces, and the bottom surface that define the imaging space S are surrounded by the above-described scattered radiation shielding cover 14C and the scattered radiation shielding plate 20 of the bottom surface portion 14C, and are subjected to X-ray shielding. ing. For this reason, X-rays leaking outside from the imaging space S during panoramic imaging or partial imaging can be reliably reduced or shielded. Thereby, even when panoramic imaging or partial imaging driven by the X-ray tube 23 is performed, the influence of X-rays on the outside of the imaging space S can be almost ignored.

 このパノラマ撮影装置1は移動可能である。したがって、「可搬型の歯科用のX線遮蔽室」とでも呼ぶべきX線遮蔽がなされた空間を持ったパノラマ撮影装置を提供できる。これにより、患者が歯科用治療椅子に仰向けに寝た状態のまま顎部のX線撮影を行うことができる。その撮影時に顎部周辺の極めて局所化された小さな撮影空間から外部に漏れることを大幅に軽減することができる。 This panoramic photographing apparatus 1 is movable. Therefore, it is possible to provide a panoramic imaging apparatus having an X-ray shielded space that should be called a “portable dental X-ray shield room”. Thereby, X-ray imaging | photography of a jaw part can be performed with the patient lying in the dental treatment chair on its back. Leakage to the outside from a very localized small imaging space around the jaw during the imaging can be greatly reduced.

 また、被検者にとって、散乱線遮蔽カバー14Cの中に頭部Hを入れるのであるが、そのカバー14Cには透光体部分14TRが設けられている。このため、常に外部を見ることができ、閉所が苦手な患者にも対応できている。 Further, for the subject, the head H is put in the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C, and the translucent portion 14TR is provided in the cover 14C. For this reason, the outside can always be seen, and even patients who are not good at closing can be handled.

 一方、上述した実施形態及び変形例では、装置1の本体BD(コンソールを除く)を移動させる移動手段としてキャスタ11を設けている。しかしながら、この移動手段は、キャスタに限定されない。装置1の本体に把持部を設け、この把持部を持って手持ちで移動させてもよい。また、台座部12の下面に、電動で回転する車輪を設けてもよい。本願に係る装置1の本体BDを歯科用治療椅子2のサイドまで自在に移動させることができる手段であればよい。 On the other hand, in the embodiment and the modification described above, the caster 11 is provided as a moving means for moving the main body BD (excluding the console) of the apparatus 1. However, this moving means is not limited to casters. A gripping portion may be provided on the main body of the apparatus 1, and the gripping portion may be held and moved by hand. Moreover, you may provide the wheel which rotates electrically on the lower surface of the base part 12. FIG. Any means capable of freely moving the main body BD of the apparatus 1 according to the present application to the side of the dental treatment chair 2 may be used.

 [第3の実施形態]
 次に、図26~図28を参照して、本発明に係るX線撮影装置に搭載可能なX線遮蔽構造を備えたX線パノラマ撮影装置の様々な例を、第3の実施形態として説明する。
[Third Embodiment]
Next, various examples of an X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus having an X-ray shielding structure that can be mounted on the X-ray imaging apparatus according to the present invention will be described as a third embodiment with reference to FIGS. To do.

 まず、図26に示す実施形態の場合、昇降機14の背面部14Bの内側に鉛板で成る散乱線遮蔽板(第3の遮蔽体)31が固定配置される。このとき、モータ等の回転中心軸Cの部分を回避するように散乱線遮蔽板31に孔を空けると都合がよい。これによっても、背面側の殆どの部分に散乱線の遮蔽機能が与えられる。 First, in the case of the embodiment shown in FIG. 26, a scattered radiation shielding plate (third shielding body) 31 made of a lead plate is fixedly arranged inside the back surface portion 14B of the elevator 14. At this time, it is convenient to make a hole in the scattered radiation shielding plate 31 so as to avoid the portion of the rotation center axis C such as a motor. This also gives the scattered radiation shielding function to most of the back side.

 さらに、図27に示す実施形態の場合、散乱線遮蔽カバー14Cの空いている正面(前面)にも暖簾状のX線防護カーテン(第4の遮蔽体)32を吊り下げる構成になっている。散乱線遮蔽カバー14Cの前面は元々、散乱線の漏れが少ないが(背面側も同様であるが)、更なる散乱線対策として、正面にもX線遮蔽策を施すものである。被検者Pの頭部Hが撮影空間Sの内部に位置決めされ、撮影準備が整った段階で散乱線カバー14Cの縁に取り付けてある複数のフック33に、オペレータがX線防護カーテン32を手動で吊り下げるようになっている。このX線防護カーテン32は、例えば撓み性のある樹脂に鉛を含有させてX線遮蔽機能を持たせた複数の短冊状部分を連ねてなる。このX線防護カーテン32の被検者の首部分に当たる部位は、その形状に沿って略半円状にくり抜かれている。 Further, in the case of the embodiment shown in FIG. 27, a warm X-ray protective curtain (fourth shield) 32 is also suspended from the vacant front surface (front surface) of the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C. The scattered radiation shielding cover 14 </ b> C originally has little scattering of scattered radiation (the same applies to the back side), but as a further countermeasure against scattered radiation, the front is also subjected to X-ray shielding. When the head H of the subject P is positioned inside the imaging space S and ready for imaging, the operator manually places the X-ray protective curtain 32 on the plurality of hooks 33 attached to the edge of the scattered radiation cover 14C. It is designed to be hung by. The X-ray protective curtain 32 is formed by connecting, for example, a plurality of strip-shaped portions in which lead is contained in a flexible resin and has an X-ray shielding function. A portion of the X-ray protective curtain 32 that corresponds to the neck portion of the subject is cut out in a substantially semicircular shape along the shape.

 この図26及び図27の実施形態に係るX線遮蔽の手段は何れか一方又は両方を採用してもよい。両方のX線遮蔽手段を採用する場合、撮影空間Sとその外界とを隔てるX線遮蔽壁部は、図28で模式的に示すように、正面及び背面の2面を合わせた6面全部を覆うことになる。これにより、撮影時に撮影空間Sから漏れ出る散乱線を更に確実に減らすことができ、前述した散乱線遮蔽機能がより強化される。したがって、撮影によって撮影空間Sの外側に与えるX線の影響を殆ど無視できるとともに、X線防護に信頼性をより一層高めることができる。勿論、このことは図26又は図27の何れか一方のX線遮蔽手段を採用する場合でも同様である。 Either or both of the X-ray shielding means according to the embodiment of FIGS. 26 and 27 may be adopted. When both X-ray shielding means are employed, the X-ray shielding wall part that separates the imaging space S from the outside world is composed of all six surfaces including the front and back surfaces as schematically shown in FIG. Will cover. Thereby, the scattered radiation leaking out from the imaging space S at the time of imaging can be further reliably reduced, and the scattered radiation shielding function described above is further strengthened. Therefore, the influence of X-rays on the outside of the imaging space S due to imaging can be almost ignored, and the reliability of X-ray protection can be further enhanced. Of course, this is the same even when the X-ray shielding means of either FIG. 26 or FIG. 27 is adopted.

 その他には、X線防護カーテン32は樹脂製の板に鉛を含有させた一枚もの板体としてもよい。 In addition, the X-ray protective curtain 32 may be a single plate made of a resin plate containing lead.

 [第4の実施形態]
 次に、図29~図37を参照して、本発明の第4の実施形態に係るX線撮影装置を説明する。このX線撮影装置はX線パノラマ装置について実施され、前述した各実施形態で説明した位置決め機構を搭載している。この実施形態では、この位置決め機構を中心に詳細に説明する。
[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, an X-ray imaging apparatus according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. This X-ray imaging apparatus is implemented for an X-ray panorama apparatus, and is equipped with the positioning mechanism described in each of the above-described embodiments. In this embodiment, the positioning mechanism will be described in detail.

 図29及び図30は、この第3の実施形態に係るX線パノラマ撮影装置1Aの側面図及び後面斜視図をそれぞれ示す。このX線パノラマ撮影装置1Aは前述した図1に示すX線パノラマ装置と同等の構成に加え、装置両サイドに搬送用の側面ハンドル55を備える。なお、移動用ハンドル54も図30に示すように両サイドに設けられている。 29 and 30 show a side view and a rear perspective view of the X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus 1A according to the third embodiment, respectively. This X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus 1A includes a side handle 55 for conveyance on both sides of the apparatus in addition to the same configuration as the X-ray panoramic apparatus shown in FIG. The moving handle 54 is also provided on both sides as shown in FIG.

 2つの側面ハンドル55の一方には、多目的の収納ラック56及び装置1Aの稼働状態を示すモニタ57を着脱自在に取り付け可能になっている。収納ラック56には、装置1に患者情報等を入力する歯科医使用PCなどの端末を収納できる。それらの端末やモニタ57は、コンソール15又は電源ボックス13の内部に配置される制御回路(図示せず)との間で例えば無線で通信可能になっている。さらに、背面部14Bには、例えば2mの長さのコード58Cを介してX線照射及びX線管・検出器の回転を指令する照射スイッチ58が設けられている。 A multipurpose storage rack 56 and a monitor 57 indicating the operating state of the apparatus 1A can be detachably attached to one of the two side handles 55. The storage rack 56 can store a terminal such as a dentist PC for inputting patient information or the like to the apparatus 1. These terminals and the monitor 57 can communicate with a control circuit (not shown) disposed inside the console 15 or the power supply box 13 by, for example, wireless communication. Further, an irradiation switch 58 for instructing X-ray irradiation and rotation of the X-ray tube / detector via a cord 58C having a length of 2 m, for example, is provided on the back surface portion 14B.

 本実施形態では、前述した図3に示す固定用ピン50、カバー部51、及びフロア固定部53と同等の機能を持つ位置決め要素が備えられている。具体的には、図29に示すように、本体BDの台座部12の正面側先端に、このパノラマ撮影装置1Aの位置を歯科用治療椅子2のサイドに停止させ且つ位置決めするための位置決め機構部61を備える。この位置決め機構部61は、後述する停止用ピン62及び位置決めピン63を備える。位置決めピン63は、後述するワイヤー機構を介して、背面部14Bの上側の縁に設けた操作レバー52(図30参照)に連動して上下動するようになっている。一方で、歯科用治療椅子2の後面側の床面Fの所定位置には、側面視で略三角形を成し、且つ停止用ピン62に当接可能であり、また位置決めピン63を挿入可能な穴を穿設したフロア固定部71が固設されている。このため、装置本体BDを移動させて、その先端位置を上記フロア固定部71の位置に合わせ、且つ停止用ピン62をフロア固定部71に当接させた状態で、操作レバー52を操作すれば、位置決めピン63を押し下げることができる。この位置決めピン63がフロア固定部71の穴(後述する)に入ることで、図3に示した位置決め状態と同様に、装置本体BDは歯科用治療椅子2に対して所定位置に位置決めされる。 In this embodiment, a positioning element having functions equivalent to those of the fixing pin 50, the cover portion 51, and the floor fixing portion 53 shown in FIG. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29, a positioning mechanism unit for stopping and positioning the position of the panoramic imaging apparatus 1A on the side of the dental treatment chair 2 at the front end of the pedestal unit 12 of the main body BD. 61 is provided. The positioning mechanism 61 includes a stop pin 62 and a positioning pin 63 which will be described later. The positioning pin 63 moves up and down in conjunction with an operation lever 52 (see FIG. 30) provided on the upper edge of the back surface part 14B via a wire mechanism described later. On the other hand, at a predetermined position of the floor surface F on the rear surface side of the dental treatment chair 2, a substantially triangular shape can be formed in a side view, and the abutment pin 62 can be contacted, and a positioning pin 63 can be inserted. A floor fixing portion 71 having a hole is fixed. For this reason, if the apparatus main body BD is moved, the tip position thereof is aligned with the position of the floor fixing portion 71, and the operation lever 52 is operated with the stop pin 62 in contact with the floor fixing portion 71. The positioning pin 63 can be pushed down. When the positioning pin 63 enters a hole (described later) of the floor fixing portion 71, the apparatus main body BD is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the dental treatment chair 2 as in the positioning state shown in FIG.

 さらに、パノラマ撮影装置1A(つまり装置本体BD)を別の場所に移動するときにも、操作レバー52を操作して位置決めピン63を引き上げる。これにより、装置本体BDをフロア固定部71との位置固定から解除させることができ、装置本体BDを別の場所へ移動させることができる。 Furthermore, when the panorama photographing apparatus 1A (that is, the apparatus main body BD) is moved to another place, the operation lever 52 is operated to raise the positioning pin 63. Thereby, apparatus main body BD can be released from position fixing with floor fixing | fixed part 71, and apparatus main body BD can be moved to another place.

 なお、上述した以外の構成及び撮影機能は、前述した第1の実施形態において説明した構成及び撮影機能と同等である。 Note that the configuration and shooting functions other than those described above are equivalent to the configuration and shooting functions described in the first embodiment.

 この装置本体BDを移動させるために、その背面部14Bの上端部に、操作レバー52の両サイドに位置して背面ハンドル54が固設されている。このため、オペレータはこの2つの背面ハンドル54を持って引いたり押したりすることで、装置本体BDをキャスタ11の自在回転によって、楽に移動させることができる。 In order to move the apparatus main body BD, a rear handle 54 is fixed to the upper end portion of the rear portion 14B so as to be positioned on both sides of the operation lever 52. For this reason, the operator can easily move the apparatus main body BD by freely rotating the caster 11 by pulling and pushing the two rear handles 54.

 さらに、この装置本体BDは、台座部12の底面に一端が固設され且つそのサイドから縦方向に立ち上がる略逆U字状の側面ハンドル55が両サイドそれぞれに設けられている。この側面ハンドル55は例えば金属製のパイプで形成されている。このため、勿論、装置本体BDを移動させるときに、運搬者がこの側面ハンドル55を使用することができる一方で、特に上述した位置決めのときに、装置本体BDをその横方向に押したり引いたりして、その位置を容易に微調整することができる。 Furthermore, this apparatus main body BD is provided with a substantially inverted U-shaped side handle 55 that is fixed at one end on the bottom surface of the pedestal portion 12 and rises vertically from the side. The side handle 55 is formed of a metal pipe, for example. For this reason, of course, when the apparatus main body BD is moved, the carrier can use the side handle 55, while the apparatus main body BD is pushed or pulled in the lateral direction, particularly at the positioning described above. Thus, the position can be easily finely adjusted.

 背面部14Bの下方であって、電源ボックス13の側面の位置には、図30に示すように、ガイドライン用の目安ポール59が床面Fに向けて垂下させた状態で取り付けられている。この目安ポール59の床面側の先端は、床面Fに近接している。一方で、床面Fには、図30に示すように、前述したフロア固定部71に向けて床面Fに配置したテープ、ペイント等によるガイドラインGLが敷かれている。このため、装置本体BDをフロア固定部71に、すなわち歯科用治療椅子2に向けて移動させるときに、目安ポール59の先端がガイドラインGLをなぞるように押していくことで、装置本体BDを容易に且つ簡単に歯科用治療椅子2にアクセスさせることができる。前記停止用ピン62がフロア固定部71に所定面に当接して止まったときに、前述した操作レバー52を操作することで、位置決めピン63が駆動させて前述した位置決めを達成できる。 A guide pole 59 for a guideline is attached to a position on the side surface of the power supply box 13 below the back surface portion 14B while being suspended toward the floor F as shown in FIG. The tip of the reference pole 59 on the floor surface side is close to the floor surface F. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30, a guideline GL made of tape, paint, or the like arranged on the floor surface F is laid on the floor surface F toward the floor fixing portion 71 described above. Therefore, when the apparatus main body BD is moved toward the floor fixing portion 71, that is, toward the dental treatment chair 2, the apparatus main body BD can be easily moved by pushing the tip of the guide pole 59 so as to follow the guideline GL. In addition, the dental treatment chair 2 can be easily accessed. When the stop pin 62 comes into contact with the predetermined surface of the floor fixing portion 71 and stops, the positioning pin 63 is driven by operating the operation lever 52 described above to achieve the positioning described above.

 以上の構成のもとに、背面ハンドル54を掴んで押すことで、X線遮蔽室(つまり、この装置1A)をキャスタ11で任意の場所まで簡単に運んで、そこで使用可能になっている。 Based on the above configuration, the X-ray shielding room (that is, the device 1A) can be easily carried to an arbitrary place by the caster 11 by grasping and pushing the back handle 54 and can be used there.

 <位置決め機構部>
 このパノラマ撮影装置1Aを歯科用治療椅子2に対して位置決めするための位置決め機構部を説明する。
<Positioning mechanism>
A positioning mechanism for positioning the panoramic imaging apparatus 1A with respect to the dental treatment chair 2 will be described.

 この位置決め機構部の主要部は勿論、パノラマ撮影装置1A自体に備えているが、床面Fに固設した位置決め用のフロア固定部71も含んで構成される。 Of course, the main part of this positioning mechanism is provided in the panoramic photographing apparatus 1A itself, but also includes a positioning floor fixing unit 71 fixed to the floor surface F.

 このパノラマ撮影装置1Aの昇降機14は、図30及び図31に示すように、その背面部14Bの上側縁の所定部位に固設した操作レバー52と、この操作レバー52を支持及び駆動させるレバー駆動部81とを備える。操作レバー52は、オペレータが手動で傾動動作をして、このパノラマ撮影装置1Aの位置を固定するために設けられている。 As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the elevator 14 of the panoramic photographing apparatus 1 </ b> A has an operation lever 52 fixed to a predetermined portion on the upper edge of the back surface portion 14 </ b> B, and a lever drive for supporting and driving the operation lever 52. Part 81. The operation lever 52 is provided for the operator to manually tilt and fix the position of the panoramic photographing apparatus 1A.

 このレバー駆動部81は、図31(A)、(B)に示すように、上記所定部位に立設された支持軸82と、この支持軸82に回動可能に軸支された回転軸183とを有する。この回転軸183に操作レバー52が固定されている。このため、操作レバー52を握って回転させれば、回転軸183も一体に回転する。操作レバー52の上部には、握り易いように手を入れる穴HLが開いているが、その下部には側面視で丸く膨らんだ膨張部52Aが部分的に形成されている。この膨張部52Aは、前記所定部位に立設されたボールプランジャ84に当接している。ボールプランジャ84は、操作レバー52の角度が0°(水平)、45°、90°(垂直)の位置で同操作レバー52にロックするともに、一定以上に傾動力が加わったときにそれらの角度の間で回転可能になっている。 As shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, the lever driving portion 81 includes a support shaft 82 erected at the predetermined portion and a rotation shaft 183 pivotally supported by the support shaft 82. And have. An operation lever 52 is fixed to the rotating shaft 183. For this reason, if the operating lever 52 is grasped and rotated, the rotating shaft 183 also rotates integrally. A hole HL for inserting a hand is opened in the upper part of the operation lever 52 so as to be easily gripped, but an inflating part 52A that swells round in a side view is partially formed in the lower part thereof. The inflatable portion 52A is in contact with a ball plunger 84 provided upright at the predetermined portion. The ball plunger 84 is locked to the operation lever 52 at positions where the angle of the operation lever 52 is 0 ° (horizontal), 45 °, and 90 ° (vertical), and when the tilting power is applied more than a certain level, It is possible to rotate between.

 さらに、このレバー駆動部81は、図31(A)、(B)に示すように、回転軸183の一端の側に設けた第1及び第2のリンク85A、85Bを有する。第1のリンク85Aの一端は、回転軸183の一端に固設されている。このため、回転軸183の回動に伴って第1のリンク85Aはスイングする。第2のリンク85Bの一端は、第1のリンク85Aの他端に固定又は回動自在にされており、第1のリンク85Aのスイング運動を往復運動に変換する。第2のリンク85Bの他端にはワイヤー86が連結されている。 Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, the lever driving portion 81 has first and second links 85A and 85B provided on one end side of the rotating shaft 183. One end of the first link 85A is fixed to one end of the rotating shaft 183. For this reason, the first link 85A swings as the rotation shaft 183 rotates. One end of the second link 85B is fixed or rotatable to the other end of the first link 85A, and converts the swing motion of the first link 85A into a reciprocating motion. A wire 86 is connected to the other end of the second link 85B.

 このため、操作レバー52を、図31(B)に示すように、直立した初期位置P1(90°の傾動位置)、その位置P1から手前に傾動させた中間位置P2(45°の傾動位置)、及び、その位置P2から更に手前に傾動させた固定位置P3(0°の傾動位置)という3段の操作位置を採り且つ各操作位置で一定の抵抗を以ってロックさせるができる。反対に、操作レバー52を位置P3、P2、P1の順に戻すことができる。操作者は、ボールプランジャ84によって一定の抵抗に抗しながら操作レバー52を操作し、各位置P1、P2、P3に到達したときにはクリック感が得られて、その位置で一定の抵抗を以ってロックされる。また、操作レバー52を初期位置P1から、中間位置P2、固定位置P3と傾動させるに従って、ワイヤー86は図31(B)の矢印Aで示した方向に移動する。操作レバー52を反対方向に傾動させれば、ワイヤー86は同図の矢印Bで示した方向に移動する。 For this reason, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), the operation lever 52 is erected in an initial position P1 (90 ° tilt position), and an intermediate position P2 tilted forward from the position P1 (45 ° tilt position). Further, it is possible to take a three-stage operation position called a fixed position P3 (a tilt position of 0 °) tilted further forward from the position P2, and to lock each operation position with a certain resistance. On the contrary, the operation lever 52 can be returned in the order of positions P3, P2, and P1. The operator operates the operation lever 52 while resisting a certain resistance by the ball plunger 84, and when a position P1, P2, P3 is reached, a click feeling is obtained, and at that position, a certain resistance is applied. Locked. Further, as the operation lever 52 is tilted from the initial position P1 to the intermediate position P2 and the fixed position P3, the wire 86 moves in the direction indicated by the arrow A in FIG. If the operation lever 52 is tilted in the opposite direction, the wire 86 moves in the direction indicated by the arrow B in FIG.

 ワイヤー86はシースSFの内部を遊挿されている。シースSFは、昇降機14の内部に、その内部機構を回避しながら、且つ、極力直線状の経路を構成するように固定して配管されている。このため、操作レバー52の傾動動作によってワイヤー86が図31の矢印A、Bで示す方向に移動する。 The wire 86 is loosely inserted inside the sheath SF. The sheath SF is fixed and piped inside the elevator 14 so as to avoid the internal mechanism and to form a linear path as much as possible. For this reason, the wire 86 moves in the directions indicated by arrows A and B in FIG.

 このワイヤー86の先端は、台座部12の正面側先端部まで到達し、その先端部に固定状態で延設されたピンカバー91の内部に至る。このピンカバー91は、台座部12の先端部に固設され、且つ、そこから嘴状に先端側に一定距離だけ突出している(図29、32参照)。 The tip of the wire 86 reaches the tip on the front side of the pedestal portion 12 and reaches the inside of the pin cover 91 that is fixedly extended to the tip. The pin cover 91 is fixed to the distal end portion of the pedestal portion 12, and projects from the distal end side by a certain distance in a bowl shape (see FIGS. 29 and 32).

 このピンカバー91の内部には、台座部12に固設されたステップ状の支持部92が設けられ、この支持部92とピンカバー91との間に、前述した位置決め機構部61が設けられている。この位置決め機構部61は、前述した停止用ピン62及び位置決めピン63を備える。 Inside the pin cover 91, a step-like support portion 92 fixed to the pedestal portion 12 is provided, and the positioning mechanism portion 61 described above is provided between the support portion 92 and the pin cover 91. Yes. The positioning mechanism 61 includes the stop pin 62 and the positioning pin 63 described above.

 支持部92の段部92Aには、図33に示すように、その横方向、すなわちX軸方向において、両端に略直方体状の突起部92Bを一体に有する。また、段部92Aには、その横方向に沿って一列に4個のガイド孔H1、H2、H3、H4が穿設されている。このうち両端のガイド孔H1、H4は位置決めピン63を上下方向にガイドするガイド孔である。このガイド孔H1、H4は、段部92A及び突起部92Bを共に上下方向に貫通している。 33. As shown in FIG. 33, the step portion 92A of the support portion 92 is integrally provided with substantially rectangular parallelepiped protrusions 92B at both ends in the lateral direction, that is, in the X-axis direction. The step portion 92A is provided with four guide holes H1, H2, H3, and H4 in a line along the lateral direction. Of these, guide holes H1 and H4 at both ends are guide holes for guiding the positioning pin 63 in the vertical direction. The guide holes H1 and H4 penetrate the stepped portion 92A and the protruding portion 92B in the vertical direction.

 ガイド孔H1、H4の夫々に、図34に示すように、位置決めピン63が保持・収容され、ガイド孔H1(H4)に沿って上下動可能になっている。位置決めピン63は、例えば所定径を有する金属製の円柱状の棒体であり、その上下方向の途中に円環状の突起63Aを有する。また、ガイド孔H1(H4)の上下方向の上端側及び下端側の位置に、同様に円環状の突起HT1、HT2がそれぞれ設けられている。このため、図34に示すように、ピン63の途中の突起63Aとガイド孔H1(H4)の下端部の突起HT2との間の距離L1が位置決めピン63の上下方向の可動域として設定されている。 As shown in FIG. 34, positioning pins 63 are held and accommodated in the guide holes H1 and H4, respectively, and can move up and down along the guide holes H1 (H4). The positioning pin 63 is, for example, a metal cylindrical rod having a predetermined diameter, and has an annular protrusion 63A in the middle in the vertical direction. Similarly, annular protrusions HT1 and HT2 are respectively provided at the positions of the upper and lower ends of the guide hole H1 (H4) in the vertical direction. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34, the distance L1 between the projection 63A in the middle of the pin 63 and the projection HT2 at the lower end of the guide hole H1 (H4) is set as the movable range in the vertical direction of the positioning pin 63. Yes.

 さらに、位置決めピン63の突起63Aとガイド孔H1(H4)の上端側の突起HT1との間のスペースにコイル状のスプリング93が介挿されている。位置決めピン63に一定の力が加わっているときには、このピン63は、スプリング93の付勢力により、図33の実線で示す初期位置Q1を採る。この初期位置Q1は、操作レバー52が初期位置P1(90°の傾動位置)にあるときに、前述した矢印Bで示す方向に働く「大きな」引っ張り力によって得られる。この場合、位置決めピン63の上端は支持部92の突起部92Bの上面と面一を成しており、またその下端も段部92Aの下面と殆ど面一を成している。つまり、位置決めピン63はガイド孔H1(H4)の中に収容されている。 Furthermore, a coiled spring 93 is inserted in a space between the protrusion 63A of the positioning pin 63 and the protrusion HT1 on the upper end side of the guide hole H1 (H4). When a certain force is applied to the positioning pin 63, the pin 63 takes the initial position Q1 indicated by the solid line in FIG. This initial position Q1 is obtained by a “large” pulling force acting in the direction indicated by the arrow B described above when the operation lever 52 is at the initial position P1 (90 ° tilt position). In this case, the upper end of the positioning pin 63 is flush with the upper surface of the projecting portion 92B of the support portion 92, and the lower end is almost flush with the lower surface of the stepped portion 92A. That is, the positioning pin 63 is accommodated in the guide hole H1 (H4).

 さらに、操作レバー52を中間位置P2(45°の傾動位置)まで傾けると、その分、ワイヤーは矢印Aの方向に動いて、スプリング93に掛かる力が「小」になる。これにより、その力の減少分だけスプリング93の弾性力が大きくなり、位置決めピン63は下方に押し下げられる。 Furthermore, when the operation lever 52 is tilted to the intermediate position P2 (45 ° tilt position), the wire moves in the direction of the arrow A, and the force applied to the spring 93 becomes “small”. As a result, the elastic force of the spring 93 is increased by the decrease in the force, and the positioning pin 63 is pushed downward.

 さらに、操作レバー52を固定位置P3(0°の傾動位置)まで傾けると、その分さらに、ワイヤーは矢印Aの方向に動いて、スプリング93に掛かる力が「0」になる。この結果、スプリング93にはそれ自体の弾性力だけとなり、位置決めピン63は更に下降する。 Further, when the operation lever 52 is tilted to the fixed position P3 (0 ° tilt position), the wire further moves in the direction of the arrow A, and the force applied to the spring 93 becomes “0”. As a result, the spring 93 has only its own elastic force, and the positioning pin 63 is further lowered.

 一方、位置決め機構部61には、図32、33に示すように、ワイヤー86の移動に応じて2つの位置決めピン63を上下させる機構である。具体的には、2つの位置決めピン63のそれぞれの頂部は吊下げ軸63Cに剛結されている。この両方のピン63の吊下げ軸63Cは、横方向、即ちX軸方向に横架された横アーム101に固定されている。この横アーム101は、その両端側の所定位置で2つのリング102に回動可能に軸支されている。更に、この2つのリング102は、2本のアーム103により、その上面に沿って転動可能に支持されている。この2本のアーム103は1本のリンク104に剛結され、このリンク104が回動アーム105に剛結されている。この回動アーム105は更に、接続体106を介して前述したワイヤー86に結合されている。 On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the positioning mechanism portion 61 is a mechanism for moving the two positioning pins 63 up and down in accordance with the movement of the wire 86. Specifically, the tops of the two positioning pins 63 are rigidly connected to the suspension shaft 63C. The suspension shaft 63 </ b> C of both the pins 63 is fixed to the lateral arm 101 that is laterally mounted in the lateral direction, that is, the X-axis direction. The horizontal arm 101 is pivotally supported by two rings 102 at predetermined positions on both ends thereof. Further, the two rings 102 are supported by the two arms 103 so as to roll along the upper surface thereof. The two arms 103 are rigidly connected to a single link 104, and the link 104 is rigidly connected to the rotating arm 105. The rotating arm 105 is further coupled to the wire 86 described above via a connecting body 106.

 なお、前述したガイド孔H1、H4は、前記横アーム101の上下方向の移動を許容するため、同ガイド孔H1、H4の上端側から所定長さに渡ってスリット状の開口部OPが形成されている(図33参照)。 The guide holes H1 and H4 described above are formed with a slit-like opening OP over a predetermined length from the upper end side of the guide holes H1 and H4 in order to allow the horizontal arm 101 to move in the vertical direction. (See FIG. 33).

 さらに、このガイド孔H1、H4の少なくとも何れか一方には、その内側面から少し凹むように3つのホールセンサ111A、111B、111Cが配設されている。この3つのホールセンサ111A~111Cは、位置決めピン63の上下方向の移動を検知する検出手段である。このため、3つのホールセンサ111A~111Cの上下方向、すなわちY軸方向の位置は、後述する初期位置Q1、第1段目の下降位置Q2、及び第2段目の下降位置Q3の距離それぞれに対応して同じ離間距離になるように設定されている。なお、初期位置Q1以外の2つの下降位置Q2、Q3は、位置決めピン63の下端がスプリング93の伸びによってフロア固定部71の後述する2段の溝、穴の底部で規制されることによって決まる位置である。 Furthermore, at least one of the guide holes H1 and H4 is provided with three hall sensors 111A, 111B, and 111C so as to be slightly recessed from the inner surface. The three hall sensors 111A to 111C are detection means for detecting the vertical movement of the positioning pin 63. Therefore, the positions of the three hall sensors 111A to 111C in the vertical direction, that is, the Y-axis direction are respectively the distances of an initial position Q1, a first-stage descending position Q2, and a second-stage descending position Q3, which will be described later. Correspondingly, the distance is set to be the same. Note that the two lower positions Q2 and Q3 other than the initial position Q1 are positions determined by the lower end of the positioning pin 63 being restricted by the bottom of the two-stage groove and hole described later of the floor fixing portion 71 by the extension of the spring 93. It is.

 一方、位置決めピン63の外周面には、初期位置Q1において、一番上のホールセンサ111Aに対向するように磁石112が埋設されている。これにより、磁石112から発生する磁束の中にホールセンサ111Aが位置するので、このホールセンサ111Aは電圧を発生し、その電圧信号を出力する。ホールセンサ111A~111Cは図示しないリード線を介して、その電圧信号を前述した電源ボックス13の制御回路に送る。 On the other hand, a magnet 112 is embedded in the outer peripheral surface of the positioning pin 63 so as to face the uppermost hall sensor 111A at the initial position Q1. As a result, the Hall sensor 111A is positioned in the magnetic flux generated from the magnet 112, so that the Hall sensor 111A generates a voltage and outputs the voltage signal. The hall sensors 111A to 111C send voltage signals to the control circuit of the power supply box 13 described above via lead wires (not shown).

 一方、図32、33に示すように、前述した真ん中の2個のガイド孔H2、H3には、2つの停止用ピン62が固設されている。つまり、この2つの停止用ピン62のそれぞれは固定部材62Aを備え、この固定部材62Aが段部92Aの固定されている。このため、本実施形態においては、2つの停止用ピン62の下端の高さは一定に保持されている。この停止用ピン62を収容するガイド孔H2(H3)の径、即ち、各停止用ピン62の径は、前述したガイド孔H1、H4、即ち、各位置決めピン63のそれよりも大きい。その理由は、位置決めの前に、オペレータが押してきた装置本体BDをフロア固定部71に当接させて停止させることを目的としているからであり、十分は耐力を持たせる必要があるためである。装置本体BDが惰性等で歯科用治療椅子2に衝突することが無いようにする必要がある。 On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, two stop pins 62 are fixedly provided in the two middle guide holes H2 and H3 described above. That is, each of the two stop pins 62 includes a fixing member 62A, and the fixing member 62A is fixed to the stepped portion 92A. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the heights of the lower ends of the two stopping pins 62 are kept constant. The diameter of the guide hole H2 (H3) that accommodates the stop pin 62, that is, the diameter of each stop pin 62 is larger than that of the above-described guide holes H1, H4, that is, the positioning pins 63. The reason is that the object body BD pushed by the operator is brought into contact with the floor fixing portion 71 and stopped before positioning, and it is necessary to have sufficient strength. It is necessary to prevent the apparatus main body BD from colliding with the dental treatment chair 2 due to inertia or the like.

 さらに、フロア固定部71を図35、36を参照して説明する。フロア固定部71は樹脂性又は金属性の横長の部材であり、歯科用治療椅子2の背もたれを倒したときのヘッドレストの近傍の床面Fにビス等で固定される。このフロア固定部71は、その横方向、即ち、ここではZ軸方向に沿った断面が図36に示すように構成されている。同図から分かるように、その前端から緩斜面71Aが始まり、その奥に、長手方向、即ち、ここではX軸方向に沿って浅く掘られた長溝71Bが横たわっている(図35参照)。この長溝71Bの長手方向の2か所には、その底面から更に掘られた位置決め用穴71Cが2か所穿設されている。この2つの位置決め用穴71C同士の間隔は、前述した2つの位置決めピン63同士の間隔と同じである。 Furthermore, the floor fixing portion 71 will be described with reference to FIGS. The floor fixing portion 71 is a horizontally long member made of resin or metal, and is fixed to the floor surface F near the headrest when the backrest of the dental treatment chair 2 is tilted with screws or the like. The floor fixing portion 71 is configured such that a cross section thereof in the horizontal direction, that is, the Z-axis direction here is shown in FIG. As can be seen from the figure, a gentle slope 71A starts from the front end, and a long groove 71B dug shallowly along the longitudinal direction, that is, the X-axis direction in this case, lies at the back (see FIG. 35). At two locations in the longitudinal direction of the long groove 71B, two positioning holes 71C that are further dug from the bottom surface are formed. The interval between the two positioning holes 71C is the same as the interval between the two positioning pins 63 described above.

 更に長溝71Bは、停止用ピン62が当接可能な急峻な当接面71Dに続き、その当接面71Dは頂部71Eを経て、その裏側、即ち歯科用治療椅子2の側に落ち込んで終端する。当接面71Dの湾曲具合は、前述して停止用ピン62の先端部の湾曲形状に一致させている。 Further, the long groove 71B follows the steep contact surface 71D with which the stop pin 62 can contact, and the contact surface 71D passes through the top portion 71E and falls to the back side, that is, the dental treatment chair 2 side and ends. . The bending state of the contact surface 71D is made to match the curved shape of the distal end portion of the stop pin 62 as described above.

 前述した3つのホールセンサ111A、111B、111Cの出力信号は、電源ボックス13の制御回路に送られる。この制御回路は、例えば図37に示すように、CPUで構成されるプロセッサ120を搭載している。このプロセッサ120は、どのホールセンサから出力信号があるか、その検出状態に応じて、赤、黄、青のLED121A、121B、121Cを点灯・消灯させる。これらのLED121A、121B、121Cは例えば本体BDの背面部14Bの上端部に設置される。プロセッサ120は、1番目のホールセンサ111Aから出力信号を受けているときには、赤色のLED121Aを点灯させ、残りの色のLED121B、121Cを消灯させる。また、プロセッサ120は、2番目のホールセンサ111Bから出力信号を受けたときには、黄色のLED121Bを点灯させ、残りの色のLED121A、121Cを消灯させる。同様に、3番目のホールセンサ111Cから出力信号を受けたときには、青色のLED121Cを点灯させ、残りの色のLED121A、121Bを消灯させる。 The output signals of the three hall sensors 111A, 111B, and 111C described above are sent to the control circuit of the power supply box 13. For example, as shown in FIG. 37, this control circuit includes a processor 120 constituted by a CPU. The processor 120 turns on / off the red, yellow, and blue LEDs 121A, 121B, and 121C depending on which Hall sensor has an output signal and the detection state thereof. These LEDs 121A, 121B, and 121C are installed, for example, at the upper end portion of the back surface portion 14B of the main body BD. When receiving an output signal from the first hall sensor 111A, the processor 120 turns on the red LED 121A and turns off the remaining LEDs 121B and 121C. Further, when receiving an output signal from the second hall sensor 111B, the processor 120 turns on the yellow LED 121B and turns off the remaining LEDs 121A and 121C. Similarly, when an output signal is received from the third hall sensor 111C, the blue LED 121C is turned on and the remaining LEDs 121A and 121B are turned off.

 本実施形態に係るパノラマ撮影装置1Aは以上のように構成されている。このため、以下に説明するように様々な作用効果を発揮する。 The panoramic photographing apparatus 1A according to the present embodiment is configured as described above. For this reason, various effects are exhibited as described below.

 まず、このパノラマ撮影装置1Aは可搬型に構成されているため、歯科医や看護師が容易に移動させることができる。このパノラマ撮影装置1Aを歯科用治療椅子2の後ろ側サイドに位置付けるときには、歯科医や看護師が背面ハンドル54を把持して、目安ポール59をガイドラインGLに沿わせながら、その装置1Aを押していけばよい。ガイドラインGLの先は、床面F上のフロア固定部71の長手方向の中心位置Cに達する(図35参照)。この中心位置Cは、歯科用治療椅子2の背もたれを倒したときのヘッドレストの横方向の中心位置に合わせられている。 First, since this panoramic photographing apparatus 1A is configured to be portable, it can be easily moved by a dentist or a nurse. When positioning the panoramic imaging apparatus 1A on the back side of the dental treatment chair 2, the dentist or nurse holds the back handle 54 and pushes the apparatus 1A while keeping the guide pole 59 along the guideline GL. That's fine. The tip of the guide line GL reaches the center position C in the longitudinal direction of the floor fixing portion 71 on the floor surface F (see FIG. 35). This center position C is matched with the lateral center position of the headrest when the backrest of the dental treatment chair 2 is tilted.

 そして、この装置1Aの位置決め機構部61の先端部がフロア固定部71に達したと思われるときに、少し押す速度を落としながら更に前進させる。これにより、位置決め機構部61の下面から所定高さL2だけ下側に吐出している2本の停止用ピン62が、フロア固定部71の当接面71Dに当接する。フロア固定部71は床面Fに固定されているため、パノラマ撮影装置1Aもその当接面71Dへの当接により停止する(図32参照)。このとき、2本の位置決めピン63の先端は初期位置Q1にて収納されており(図34参照)、しかも、フロア固定部71の長溝71Bの真上に位置する。このとき、第1のホールセンサ111Aの出力信号により、赤色のLED121Aが点灯しているので、未だ位置決めがなされていないことを告知できる。 Then, when it is considered that the tip of the positioning mechanism 61 of the apparatus 1A has reached the floor fixing portion 71, the device is further advanced while reducing the pressing speed slightly. Accordingly, the two stop pins 62 discharged from the lower surface of the positioning mechanism portion 61 by the predetermined height L2 come into contact with the contact surface 71D of the floor fixing portion 71. Since the floor fixing portion 71 is fixed to the floor surface F, the panorama photographing apparatus 1A also stops when it comes into contact with the contact surface 71D (see FIG. 32). At this time, the tips of the two positioning pins 63 are stored at the initial position Q1 (see FIG. 34), and are positioned directly above the long groove 71B of the floor fixing portion 71. At this time, since the red LED 121A is lit by the output signal of the first hall sensor 111A, it can be notified that the positioning has not been performed yet.

 この搬送が終わると、オペレータは操作レバー52をその初期位置P1から中間位置P2まで傾動させる。これに応答して、ワイヤー86が押されて(緩んで)回動アーム105も前方に回転し(図32、矢印A参照)、スプリング93の弾性力が勝り、2本の位置決めピン63が下方に押される。これにより、この2本の位置決めピン63がフロア固定部71の長溝71Bまで落とし込まれる。つまり、位置決めピン63の下端は、図34に示す初期位置から第1段目の下降位置Q2に移行する。これに応答し、第2のホールセンサ111Bの出力信号により、黄色のLED121Bが点灯する。これは、未だ位置決めがなされていないが、位置決めの第1段階は完了したことをオペレータに知らせる。 When this conveyance is completed, the operator tilts the operation lever 52 from the initial position P1 to the intermediate position P2. In response to this, the wire 86 is pushed (loosened) and the turning arm 105 is also rotated forward (see FIG. 32, arrow A), the spring 93 has excellent elastic force, and the two positioning pins 63 are moved downward. Pressed. As a result, the two positioning pins 63 are dropped into the long groove 71 </ b> B of the floor fixing portion 71. That is, the lower end of the positioning pin 63 shifts from the initial position shown in FIG. 34 to the first-stage lowered position Q2. In response to this, the yellow LED 121B is turned on by the output signal of the second hall sensor 111B. This informs the operator that the positioning has not yet been done, but that the first stage of positioning has been completed.

 そこで、オペレータは、操作レバー52をその中間位置P2から固定位置P3まで傾動させる。これに応答して、ワイヤー86が更に緩んで回動アーム105も更に前方に回転し(図32、矢印A参照)、2本の位置決めピン63も更に下方に押される。このとき、2本の位置決めピン63の先端部の位置が長溝71Bの底部の2つの位置決め用穴71Cに合致していれば、それらのピン63はそのまま位置決め用穴71Cに落とし込まれる(図34の第2段目の下降位置Q3を参照)。この落し込みの状態になると、スプリング93の付勢力により、位置決め機構部61はフロア固定部71にロックされる。このロックの状態になると、スプリング93は位置決め用穴71Cにほぼ嵌合し且つ床面Fに対する踏ん張る力を発揮する。これにより、装置本体BD、即ちパノラマ撮影装置1Aはフロア固定部71の位置によって位置決めされる。つまり、パノラマ撮影装置1Aは歯科用治療椅子2に対して所定の位置に固定状態で位置付けられる。このとき、第3のホールセンサ111Cの出力信号が有効になるので、青色のLED121Cが点灯する。これにより、位置決め完了が告知される。 Therefore, the operator tilts the operation lever 52 from the intermediate position P2 to the fixed position P3. In response to this, the wire 86 is further loosened and the rotating arm 105 is further rotated forward (see arrow A in FIG. 32), and the two positioning pins 63 are further pushed downward. At this time, if the positions of the tips of the two positioning pins 63 coincide with the two positioning holes 71C at the bottom of the long groove 71B, the pins 63 are dropped into the positioning holes 71C as they are (FIG. 34). (Refer to the lower position Q3 of the second stage). In this lowered state, the positioning mechanism portion 61 is locked to the floor fixing portion 71 by the urging force of the spring 93. When in this locked state, the spring 93 is almost fitted in the positioning hole 71C and exerts a force to stretch against the floor surface F. Accordingly, the apparatus main body BD, that is, the panorama photographing apparatus 1A is positioned by the position of the floor fixing unit 71. That is, the panoramic photographing apparatus 1A is positioned in a fixed state with respect to the dental treatment chair 2 at a predetermined position. At this time, since the output signal of the third hall sensor 111C becomes valid, the blue LED 121C is lit. Thereby, the completion of positioning is notified.

 しかしながら、上述の落し込みの段階で、2本の位置決めピン63の先端部が2つの位置決め用穴71Cの位置から少しずれていることもある。このような場合、オペレータは背面ハンドル54又は側面ハンドル55を持って装置本体BDを左右に少し動かせばよい。これにより、位置決め用穴71Cの位置に合うピン位置が探し当てることができる。このように位置が合えば、操作レバー52は既に固定位置P2にあってスプリング93の付勢力が働いているので、2本の位置決めピン63は自動的にカチッと2つの位置決め用穴71Cにそれぞれ落し込まれロックされる。つまり、位置決めピン63は、図34に示す第1段目の下降位置Q2から第2段目の下降位置Q3の状態になる。これにより、青色のLED121Cが点灯して位置決めが完了する。 However, at the above-described drop-in stage, the tip ends of the two positioning pins 63 may be slightly displaced from the positions of the two positioning holes 71C. In such a case, the operator may hold the back handle 54 or the side handle 55 and slightly move the apparatus main body BD left and right. Thereby, a pin position that matches the position of the positioning hole 71C can be found. If the positions match, the operating lever 52 is already in the fixed position P2 and the urging force of the spring 93 is working, so the two positioning pins 63 automatically click into the two positioning holes 71C. Dropped and locked. That is, the positioning pin 63 changes from the first-stage lowered position Q2 to the second-stage lowered position Q3 shown in FIG. As a result, the blue LED 121C is lit and positioning is completed.

 次いで、散乱線遮蔽カバー14Cを後ろ側に退避させる(図3の仮想線「退避位置」参照)。この段階では、X線管アーム21及び検出器アーム22はそれぞれの初期位置に位置付けられている。そこで、歯科医(又はオペレータは、歯科用治療椅子2の背もたれを倒しながら、患者Pの頭部Hを撮影空間Sの所定位置に位置決めする。この位置決めは昇降機14の高さ方向の調節、及び、前述したレーザビームによる正中線、フランクフルト平面、咬合平面及び犬歯に対して行われる。 Next, the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C is retracted to the rear side (see the imaginary line “retraction position” in FIG. 3). At this stage, the X-ray tube arm 21 and the detector arm 22 are positioned at their initial positions. Therefore, the dentist (or operator) positions the head H of the patient P at a predetermined position in the imaging space S while tilting the backrest of the dental treatment chair 2. This positioning is performed by adjusting the height direction of the elevator 14 and The laser beam is applied to the midline, the Frankfurt plane, the occlusal plane and the canine.

 この患者位置決め後、散乱線遮蔽カバー14Cを前方向の撮影位置まで移動させる。これにより、画成された撮影空間Sに被検者Pの頭部Hが位置した状態になる。この状態で、歯科医は少し離れた位置から照射スイッチ58を押すことで、前述したパノラマ撮影が起動し、データの収集が行われる。この一連の撮影手順は第1及び第2の実施形態で説明したものと同様である。 After this patient positioning, the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C is moved to the imaging position in the forward direction. As a result, the head H of the subject P is positioned in the defined imaging space S. In this state, when the dentist presses the irradiation switch 58 from a position slightly away, the panoramic imaging described above is activated and data is collected. This series of photographing procedures is the same as that described in the first and second embodiments.

 上述した位置決め及びデータ収集が終わると、散乱線遮蔽カバー14Cを空けて(退避位置)、歯科用治療椅子2の背もたれを元に戻すことで被検者Pを撮影空間Sから解放する。次いで、散乱線遮蔽カバー14Cを閉じて(撮影位置)、パノラマ撮影装置1Aを別の場所へ移動させる。このときには、操作レバー52を固定位置P3、中間位置P2、及び初期位置P1への連続的に戻せばよい。これにより、ワイヤー86及び回動アーム105が戻され(図32、矢印Bを参照)、スプリング93の弾性力に抗して位置決めピン63が初期位置に戻って初期位置Q1を採る。これに応じて、赤色のLED121Aが点灯する。これにより、装置本体BDはフロア固定部71から解放されるので(アンロック)、装置1Aを別の場所へ移動させることができる。 When the positioning and data collection described above are completed, the subject P is released from the imaging space S by opening the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C (retracted position) and returning the back of the dental treatment chair 2 to the original position. Next, the scattered radiation shielding cover 14C is closed (imaging position), and the panorama imaging apparatus 1A is moved to another location. At this time, the operation lever 52 may be continuously returned to the fixed position P3, the intermediate position P2, and the initial position P1. As a result, the wire 86 and the rotating arm 105 are returned (see FIG. 32, arrow B), and the positioning pin 63 returns to the initial position against the elastic force of the spring 93 and takes the initial position Q1. In response to this, the red LED 121A is turned on. Thereby, since the apparatus main body BD is released from the floor fixing | fixed part 71 (unlocking), the apparatus 1A can be moved to another place.

 このように、本パノラマ撮影装置1Aを自在に移動させることができるとともに、歯科用治療椅子2に対して確実に且つ精度良く位置決めすることができる。この位置決めのときに、停止用ピン62を用いて装置本体BDを最初に確実に停止させるので、その後の位置決めが容易に且つ迅速に行うことができる。さらに、歯科用治療椅子2へのアクセス時には、オペレータは目安ポール59とガイドラインGLによるガイド機能を得ることができるので、位置決めまでの作業が容易になる。さらに、位置決め完了までのピン状態をLEDによりモニタできるので、オペレータは位置決めの作業効率を高めることができる。 As described above, the panoramic photographing apparatus 1A can be freely moved and can be reliably and accurately positioned with respect to the dental treatment chair 2. At the time of this positioning, the apparatus main body BD is surely stopped first using the stop pin 62, so that the subsequent positioning can be performed easily and quickly. Furthermore, when accessing the dental treatment chair 2, the operator can obtain a guide function using the guide pole 59 and the guide line GL, so that the operations up to positioning are facilitated. Furthermore, since the pin state until the positioning is completed can be monitored by the LED, the operator can improve the positioning work efficiency.

 その他、実施形態においても、前述した様々な作用効果が同様に得られる。この作用効果の中には、撮影空間Sの前後方向に漏れる散乱線の量は非常に少ないこと、「可搬型の歯科用のX線遮蔽室」とでも呼ぶべきX線遮蔽がなされること、撮影中に撮影空間の患者の様子を用意に確認でき且つ閉所が苦手な患者にも対応できていること、がある。 In addition, the various functions and effects described above can be similarly obtained in the embodiment. Among these effects, the amount of scattered radiation that leaks in the front-rear direction of the imaging space S is very small, and X-ray shielding that should be called a “portable dental X-ray shielding room” is made. During imaging, the patient in the imaging space can be easily checked, and even patients who are not good at closing can be handled.

 (その他の変形例)
 なお、前述した実施形態の場合、パノラマ撮影装置1Aの装置本体BDを歯科用治療椅子2まで移動させるときに、オペレータはガイドラインGLと目安ポール59とをガイドにしていた。このガイド機能については更に様々な実施形態が可能である。例えば、図20に示すように、直線的なガイドラインGLの所定位置にこれに交差する「長い」、「中位」、「短い」といった複数の交差ラインGLsを貼設しておける。この交差ラインGLsの一番短い交差ラインの真上に目安ポール59が到達したときに、位置決めピン63がフロア固定部71の長溝71Bの真上になるように設定される。したがって、オペレータは目安ポール59が長い交差ラインGLsに到達した時点で、装置本体BDの先端部は歯科用治療椅子2に近いことを確実に知ることができ、確実に徐行体制に入ることができる。したがって、装置本体BDをフロア固定部71へ確実に位置決めできる。
(Other variations)
In the case of the above-described embodiment, when the apparatus main body BD of the panoramic photographing apparatus 1A is moved to the dental treatment chair 2, the operator uses the guideline GL and the guide pole 59 as a guide. Various embodiments of the guide function are possible. For example, as shown in FIG. 20, a plurality of intersecting lines GLs such as “long”, “medium”, and “short” intersecting with each other can be pasted at a predetermined position of the linear guideline GL. The positioning pin 63 is set to be directly above the long groove 71B of the floor fixing portion 71 when the reference pole 59 reaches just above the shortest intersection line of the intersection line GLs. Therefore, when the guide pole 59 reaches the long intersection line GLs, the operator can surely know that the distal end portion of the apparatus main body BD is close to the dental treatment chair 2 and can surely enter the slow running system. . Therefore, the apparatus main body BD can be reliably positioned on the floor fixing portion 71.

 また、図38に示すように、位置決め機構部61の一部に、ガイドラインGLとの間において非接触でレーザ、超音波などの媒体を送受する送受信部131を設けてもよい。この送受信部131の出力信号を例えばプロセッサ120で処理することで、フロア固定部71までの距離情報を音声や光で知ることがきる。さらに、図39に示すように、前方を撮影する小型カメラ132を位置決め機構部61の前面に設けてもよい。この撮影画像を操作レバーの近くに設けたディスプレイ(図示せず)に表示するようにしてもよい。これらの手段131、132によれば、何れも見え難い前方のフロア固定部71を確実の検知でき、位置決めをする上で大いに助けとなる。 38, a transmission / reception unit 131 that transmits and receives a medium such as a laser and an ultrasonic wave in a non-contact manner with the guide line GL may be provided in a part of the positioning mechanism unit 61. By processing the output signal of the transmission / reception unit 131 by, for example, the processor 120, the distance information to the floor fixing unit 71 can be known by voice or light. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 39, a small camera 132 that photographs the front may be provided on the front surface of the positioning mechanism unit 61. This captured image may be displayed on a display (not shown) provided near the operation lever. According to these means 131 and 132, it is possible to reliably detect the front floor fixing portion 71 which is difficult to see, which greatly helps in positioning.

 上述のパノラマ撮影装置1Aの場合、位置決めピン63の押し込み状態を示すセンサとしてホールセンサを設けたが、これは他のセンサであってもよい。例えば光センサ等の非接触センサを使ってもよいし、物理的な接触センサを用いてもよい。また、センサの設置位置は必ずしも前述した実施形態に限られず、位置決めピン63の移動を検知できる場所であればよい。例えば、フロア固定部71の側に非接触センサ又は接触センサを埋設し、押し込まれてくる位置決めピン63の到来を検知し、その検知信号を無線で装置本体BDに送ることもできる。これにより、前述した実施形態と同等の検知動作を実行できる。 In the case of the above-described panoramic photographing apparatus 1A, the hall sensor is provided as a sensor indicating the pushing state of the positioning pin 63, but this may be another sensor. For example, a non-contact sensor such as an optical sensor may be used, or a physical contact sensor may be used. Further, the installation position of the sensor is not necessarily limited to the above-described embodiment, and may be a place where the movement of the positioning pin 63 can be detected. For example, a non-contact sensor or a contact sensor can be embedded on the floor fixing portion 71 side, the arrival of the positioning pin 63 being pushed in can be detected, and the detection signal can be sent wirelessly to the apparatus body BD. Thereby, the detection operation equivalent to embodiment mentioned above can be performed.

 また、前述したパノラマ撮影装置1Aにおける停止用ピン62を省略する機構を採用してもよい。その場合には、位置決めピンにもストッパ機能を持たせることが望ましいので、その分、ピンの径を太くする、又は、ピンの本数を3本以上にするなどの変形が望ましい。 Further, a mechanism in which the stop pin 62 in the panoramic photographing apparatus 1A described above is omitted may be employed. In that case, it is desirable that the positioning pin also has a stopper function, and accordingly, a deformation such as increasing the diameter of the pin or increasing the number of pins to three or more is desirable.

 さらに、フロア固定部71には単に位置決め用穴71Cだけを設けるようにして良い。つまり、長溝71Bを形成しない構造を採用してもよい。この場合、位置決めピン63は単純に2段階の上下動をすることになる。この場合、操作レバー52の操作位置も図28の初期位置P1(90°の傾動位置)と固定位置P3(0°の傾動位置)という2段の操作位置を採る。このため、操作レバー52への固定位置P3への傾動操作に応答して下降してきた位置決めピン63の先端が位置決め用穴71Cに合致している場合は、そのままその穴71Cに嵌合してロックされる。しかし、合致していない場合、位置決めピン63の先端部は位置決め用穴71Cの上端部周辺で止まっている。この場合、オペレータは背面ハンドル54又は側面ハンドル55を持って装置本体BDを左右に少し動かせば、その位置決め用穴71Cを探し当てることができる。位置決め用穴71Cが探し当てられると、位置決めピン63はスプリング93の弾性力によって自動的に下降し、前述と同様にロック状態になる。このため、この2段の動作をさせる構造を採用する場合、位置決め用穴71Cの上端の開口部を少し広い径にし、その径が縮小するようにテーパを付けてもよい。 Furthermore, only the positioning hole 71C may be provided in the floor fixing portion 71. That is, a structure in which the long groove 71B is not formed may be employed. In this case, the positioning pin 63 simply moves up and down in two stages. In this case, the operation position of the operation lever 52 also takes the two-stage operation position of the initial position P1 (90 ° tilt position) and the fixed position P3 (0 ° tilt position) in FIG. For this reason, when the tip of the positioning pin 63 that has been lowered in response to the tilting operation to the fixing position P3 of the operation lever 52 is aligned with the positioning hole 71C, it is directly fitted into the hole 71C and locked. Is done. However, if they do not match, the tip of the positioning pin 63 stops around the upper end of the positioning hole 71C. In this case, the operator can find the positioning hole 71C by holding the back handle 54 or the side handle 55 and slightly moving the apparatus main body BD left and right. When the positioning hole 71C is located, the positioning pin 63 is automatically lowered by the elastic force of the spring 93, and is locked as described above. For this reason, when adopting the structure for performing the two-stage operation, the opening at the upper end of the positioning hole 71C may be slightly wider and tapered so that the diameter is reduced.

 さらに、位置決めピン63の数は必ずしも2本でなくてもよく、3本以上であってもよいことは勿論である。また、前述した実施形態のように2本の位置決めピン63を設ける場合、ピン相互の間隔は装置本体BDの幅方向、すなわちX軸方向の両端に分離して位置決めするようにしてもよい。 Furthermore, the number of positioning pins 63 is not necessarily two, and may be three or more. Further, when the two positioning pins 63 are provided as in the above-described embodiment, the distance between the pins may be separated and positioned at both ends in the width direction of the apparatus main body BD, that is, in the X-axis direction.

 さらに、位置決めピン63だけを採用する構造の場合、床面Fの構造如何によっては、フロア固定部71を設けずに、床面Fに位置決め用穴71Cを直接、形成するようにしても良い。この場合、使用しないときに、塵などが位置決め用穴71Cに溜まることを防止するため、着脱自在な蓋を付けるようにすればよい。 Furthermore, in the case of a structure employing only the positioning pin 63, the positioning hole 71C may be directly formed in the floor surface F without providing the floor fixing portion 71 depending on the structure of the floor surface F. In this case, a removable lid may be attached to prevent dust and the like from accumulating in the positioning hole 71C when not in use.

 床面Fの構造如何によっては、前述したフロア固定部71自体を着脱自在に床面Fに取り付け可能にしてもよい。 Depending on the structure of the floor surface F, the above-described floor fixing portion 71 may be detachably attachable to the floor surface F.

 なお、本発明は上述した実施形態及び変形例で示した構成に限定されるものではなく、特許請求の範囲に記載の主旨を逸脱しない限り、更に様々に変形して実施可能なものである。 Note that the present invention is not limited to the configurations shown in the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be implemented with various modifications without departing from the spirit described in the claims.

1、1A 歯科用X線パノラマ撮影装置(X線撮影装置)
11 キャスタ(移動手段)
12 台座部
14 昇降機
14B 背面部
14C 散乱線遮蔽カバー(遮蔽体の一部を成す)
14L、14R 側面部(第1の遮蔽体、壁体)
14U 上面部(第1の遮蔽体、天井体)
カバー(遮蔽体の一部を成す)
14D 底面部
15 コンソール(読出し手段、制御手段)
20 散乱線遮蔽板(第2の遮蔽体)
21 X線管アーム
21A 対向アーム部分
21L 支持部
21B、22B、83;145、146、147、148、149、170、171、175、173(回転駆動部(駆動手段))
22 検出器アーム
22A 対向アーム部分
22L 支持部
23 X線管
24 検出器
31 散乱線遮蔽板(第3の遮蔽体)
32 X線防護カーテン(第4の遮蔽体)
52 操作レバー
61 位置決め機構部
62 停止用ピン
63 位置決めピン
71 フロア固定部(固定フレーム)
71B 長溝
71C 位置決め用穴
81 レバー駆動部
91 ピンカバー
133 コントローラ
134 第1の記憶部
135 データプロセッサ
25 ティーチングアーム(ティーチング装置の一部を成す)
25A 基部側アーム部(第1のアーム部)
25B 先端側アーム部(アーム把持部を含む第2のアーム部)
133 コントローラ(ティーチング装置の一部を成す)
134 第1の記憶部(ティーチング装置の一部を成す)
135 データプロセッサ
170 回動機構(ティーチング装置の一部を成す)
171 エンコーダ(ティーチング装置の一部を成す)
172 回動機構(ティーチング装置の一部を成す)
173 エンコーダ(ティーチング装置の一部を成す)
181 レーザ発振器(ティーチング装置の一部を成す)
182 押しボタンスイッチ(ティーチング装置の一部を成す)
O 回転中心(アームの回転中心)
CA 中心軸(アームの回転中心軸)
AXs 第1の軸(X線管の首振り回転中心軸)
AXd 第2の軸(検出器の首振り回転中心軸)
C 検出器の横幅方向の中心位置(検出中心位置)
FP X線管のX線焦点(X線焦点位置)
1, 1A Dental X-ray panoramic imaging device (X-ray imaging device)
11 Casters (moving means)
12 Pedestal part 14 Elevator 14B Back part 14C Scattered ray shielding cover (forms a part of shielding body)
14L, 14R Side (first shield, wall)
14U Top surface (first shield, ceiling)
Cover (part of the shield)
14D bottom part 15 console (reading means, control means)
20 Scattered ray shielding plate (second shielding body)
21 X-ray tube arm 21A Opposing arm portion 21L Support portions 21B, 22B, 83; 145, 146, 147, 148, 149, 170, 171, 175, 173 (rotation drive portion (drive means))
22 Detector arm 22A Opposing arm portion 22L Support portion 23 X-ray tube 24 Detector 31 Scattered ray shielding plate (third shielding body)
32 X-ray protective curtain (fourth shield)
52 Operation lever 61 Positioning mechanism part 62 Stopping pin 63 Positioning pin 71 Floor fixing part (fixing frame)
71B Long groove 71C Positioning hole 81 Lever drive unit 91 Pin cover 133 Controller 134 First storage unit 135 Data processor 25 Teaching arm (forms part of teaching device)
25A Base side arm (first arm)
25B Front end side arm part (second arm part including arm gripping part)
133 Controller (part of teaching device)
134 1st memory | storage part (forms a part of teaching device)
135 Data processor 170 Rotation mechanism (forms part of teaching device)
171 Encoder (forms part of teaching device)
172 Rotating mechanism (part of teaching device)
173 Encoder (part of teaching device)
181 Laser oscillator (part of teaching device)
182 Push button switch (part of teaching device)
O Rotation center (Arm rotation center)
CA central axis (arm rotation central axis)
AXs first axis (X-ray tube swing axis)
AXd second axis (center axis of rotation of detector swing)
C Center position in the width direction of the detector (detection center position)
FP X-ray tube X-ray focal point (X-ray focal point position)

Claims (38)

 点状の焦点を有し、この焦点から広がりを持ったX線を照射するX線管と、
 このX線管から照射される前記X線を検出して当該X線の量に対応したデータを出力する検出器と、を備え、前記X線管と前記検出器を予め定めた所定の回転中心を通る中心軸の周りに回動可能なX線撮影装置において、
 前記X線管がX線の照射するように前記X線管を収容した管収容部と、この管収容部を前記中心軸に平行な第1の軸の周りに回動可能に支持する管支持部とを備えたX線管アームと、
 前記管収容部を前記管支持部に対して前記第1の軸の周りに回動させる第1の駆動手段と、
 前記X線を入射させるように前記検出器を収容した検出器収容部と、この検出器収容部を前記中心軸に平行な第2の軸の周りに回動可能に支持する検出器支持部とを備えた検出器アームと、
 前記検出器収容部を前記検出器支持部に対して前記第2の軸の周りに回動させる第2の駆動手段と、
 前記X線管アーム及び前記検出器アームを互いに独立して同軸で駆動可能に支持するともに、当該両アームを駆動して前記中心軸の周りを回動させる第3の駆動手段と、
 前記X線管アーム、前記検出器アーム、前記管収容部、及び前記検出器収容部を前記X線によるスキャンのために互いに独立して回動させる速度パターンに応じて前記第1、第2、及び第3の駆動手段を制御する制御手段と、
 を備えたことを特徴とするX線撮影装置。
An X-ray tube having a point-like focus and irradiating X-rays extending from the focus;
A detector that detects the X-rays emitted from the X-ray tube and outputs data corresponding to the amount of the X-rays, and has a predetermined rotation center for the X-ray tube and the detector. In an X-ray imaging apparatus capable of rotating around a central axis passing through
A tube housing that houses the X-ray tube so that the X-ray tube emits X-rays, and a tube support that rotatably supports the tube housing around a first axis parallel to the central axis An X-ray tube arm with a portion;
First driving means for rotating the tube housing portion around the first axis with respect to the tube support portion;
A detector accommodating portion that accommodates the detector so as to make the X-ray incident thereon; and a detector supporting portion that rotatably supports the detector accommodating portion around a second axis parallel to the central axis. A detector arm with
Second driving means for rotating the detector housing portion around the second axis with respect to the detector support portion;
A third driving means for supporting the X-ray tube arm and the detector arm so that they can be driven coaxially independently of each other, and driving both arms to rotate around the central axis;
The X-ray tube arm, the detector arm, the tube housing portion, and the detector housing portion according to a speed pattern for rotating the X-ray tube arm independently of each other for scanning by the X-ray. And control means for controlling the third drive means;
An X-ray imaging apparatus comprising:
 前記中心軸から前記第1の軸までの第1の距離は、前記中心軸から前記第2の軸までの第2の距離よりも大きい値に設定され、
 前記X線管と前記検出器は互いに異なる円軌道上に沿って回転可能であることを特徴とする請求項1に記載のX線撮影装置。
A first distance from the central axis to the first axis is set to a value greater than a second distance from the central axis to the second axis;
The X-ray imaging apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the X-ray tube and the detector are rotatable along mutually different circular orbits.
 前記管アーム及び前記検出器アームは、前記中心軸に直交する断面に沿った径方向において前記X線の散乱線を遮蔽する散乱線遮蔽体で覆われた撮影空間に配置されていることを特徴とする請求項1又は2に記載のX線撮影装置。 The tube arm and the detector arm are arranged in an imaging space covered with a scattered radiation shielding body that shields the scattered radiation of the X-ray in a radial direction along a cross section orthogonal to the central axis. The X-ray imaging apparatus according to claim 1 or 2.  前記速度パターンは、前記管アームを前記中心軸の周りに回動させる第1の速度パターンと、前記検出器アームを前記中心軸の周りに回動させる第2の速度パターンと、前記管収容部を前記第1の軸の周りに回動させる第3の速度パターンと、前記検出器収容部を前記第2の軸の周りに回動させる第4の速度パターンとを含むことを特徴とする請求項1~3の何れか一項に記載のX線撮影装置。 The speed pattern includes a first speed pattern for rotating the tube arm about the central axis, a second speed pattern for rotating the detector arm about the central axis, and the tube receiving portion. A third speed pattern for rotating the detector around the first axis, and a fourth speed pattern for rotating the detector housing portion about the second axis. Item 4. The X-ray imaging apparatus according to any one of Items 1 to 3.  前記X線撮影装置は歯科用のX線パノラマ撮影装置であり、
 前記第1、第2、第3、及び第4の速度パターンは、被検者の歯列に対して予め設定されている基準断層面に最適焦点化するように前記X線をスキャンさせる速度パターンであることを特徴とする請求項4に記載のX線撮影装置。
The X-ray imaging apparatus is a dental X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus,
The first, second, third, and fourth speed patterns are speed patterns for scanning the X-rays so as to optimally focus on a reference tomographic plane that is set in advance for the dentition of the subject. The X-ray imaging apparatus according to claim 4, wherein:
 前記X線撮影装置は歯科用のX線パノラマ撮影装置であり、
 前記第1、第2、第3、及び第4の速度パターンは、被検者の歯列に対して予め設定されている基準断層面に直交するように前記X線ビームを照射し且つ当該基準断層面を最適焦点化するように前記X線をスキャンさせる速度パターンであることを特徴とする請求項4に記載のX線撮影装置。
The X-ray imaging apparatus is a dental X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus,
The first, second, third, and fourth velocity patterns irradiate the X-ray beam so as to be orthogonal to a reference tomographic plane that is set in advance with respect to the dentition of the subject, and the reference The X-ray imaging apparatus according to claim 4, wherein the X-ray imaging apparatus is a speed pattern that scans the X-rays so that a tomographic plane is optimally focused.
 前記速度パターンは、前記中心軸の周りの所定角度範囲をスキャンするときの時間を横軸に採り、その所定角度範囲の角度を縦軸に採ったパターンであり、
 前記速度パターンを予め設定して記憶している記憶手段と、
 前記スキャン時に前記記憶手段から前記速度パターンの情報を読み出して前記制御手段に提供する読出し手段と、を備えた
ことを特徴とする請求項1~6の何れか一項に記載のX線撮影装置。
The speed pattern is a pattern in which the horizontal axis represents time when scanning a predetermined angle range around the central axis, and the vertical axis represents the angle of the predetermined angle range,
Storage means for presetting and storing the speed pattern;
7. An X-ray imaging apparatus according to claim 1, further comprising a reading unit that reads information on the speed pattern from the storage unit and provides the information to the control unit during the scan. .
 前記X線の実際の照射を模擬したレーザビームを、前記管収容部と前記検出器収容部との間の撮影空間に位置する被検体の撮影部位に照射して当該撮影部位の部分的な撮影範囲を撮影前に指示可能なティーチング手段と、
 このティーチング手段により指示された前記部分的な撮影範囲を解読し、その解読結果に応じた前記速度パターンを設定する設定手段と、
を備えたことを特徴とする請求項2に記載のX線撮影装置。
A laser beam simulating the actual irradiation of the X-ray is irradiated to the imaging region of the subject located in the imaging space between the tube housing unit and the detector housing unit, and partial imaging of the imaging site is performed. Teaching means that can indicate the range before shooting,
Setting means for decoding the partial photographing range instructed by the teaching means, and setting the speed pattern according to the decoding result;
The X-ray imaging apparatus according to claim 2, further comprising:
 前記ティーチング手段は、前記中心軸と同軸に支持されたティーチングアームと、このティーチングアームの前記中心軸の周りの回転角を示す角度情報を検出する第1の回転角センサとを備え、
 前記ティーチングアームは、前記中心軸の周りに径方向に伸びる第1のアーム部と、この第1のアーム部から前記中心軸と並行な方向に延設され且つ前記レーザビームを出力する第2のアーム部とを備え、
 前記第2のアーム部は、その先端側のアーム部分と、この先端側のアーム部分に連結し且つ当該先端側のアーム部分を自転可能に保持する残りのアーム部分と、当該先端側のアーム部分の、当該残りのアーム部分に対する自転角度を示す角度情報を検出する第2の回転角センサを備え、
 前記設定手段は、前記第1及び第2の回転角センサが検出した前記角度情報を読み込む角度情報読込み手段と、この角度情報読込み手段が読み込んだ前記角度情報に基づいて前記速度パターンを演算する速度パターン演算手段とを、備えたことを特徴とする請求項8に記載のX線撮影装置。
The teaching means includes a teaching arm supported coaxially with the central axis, and a first rotational angle sensor that detects angular information indicating a rotational angle around the central axis of the teaching arm,
The teaching arm includes a first arm portion extending in a radial direction around the central axis, and a second arm extending from the first arm portion in a direction parallel to the central axis and outputting the laser beam. With arm part,
The second arm portion includes a distal arm portion, a remaining arm portion connected to the distal arm portion and rotatably supporting the distal arm portion, and the distal arm portion. A second rotation angle sensor for detecting angle information indicating a rotation angle with respect to the remaining arm portion,
The setting means includes angle information reading means for reading the angle information detected by the first and second rotation angle sensors, and a speed for calculating the speed pattern based on the angle information read by the angle information reading means. The X-ray imaging apparatus according to claim 8, further comprising a pattern calculation unit.
 前記第2のアーム部は、前記先端側のアーム部分に前記レーザビームを出力するレーザ出力手段を備え、
 このレーザ出力手段の出力点は前記X線管のX焦点の位置を模した空間位置に設定されている、ことを特徴とする請求項9に記載のX線撮影装置。
The second arm portion includes laser output means for outputting the laser beam to the arm portion on the distal end side,
10. The X-ray imaging apparatus according to claim 9, wherein the output point of the laser output means is set to a spatial position imitating the position of the X focal point of the X-ray tube.
 前記速度パターンは、前記X線管アームを前記中心軸の周りに回動させる第1の速度パターンと、前記検出器アームを前記中心軸の周りに回動させる第2の速度パターンと、前記管収容部を前記第1の軸の周りに回動させる第3の速度パターンと、前記検出器収容部を前記第2の軸の周りに回動させる第4の速度パターンとを含むことを特徴とする請求項8~9の何れか一項に記載のX線撮影装置。 The speed pattern includes a first speed pattern for rotating the X-ray tube arm about the central axis, a second speed pattern for rotating the detector arm about the central axis, and the tube. Including a third speed pattern for rotating the accommodating portion around the first axis, and a fourth speed pattern for rotating the detector accommodating portion about the second axis. The X-ray imaging apparatus according to any one of claims 8 to 9.  前記X線撮影装置は歯科用のX線パノラマ撮影装置であり、
 前記第1、第2、第3、及び第4の速度パターンは、被検者の歯列に対して予め設定されている基準断層面に最適焦点化するように前記X線をスキャンさせる速度パターンであることを特徴とする請求項11に記載のX線撮影装置。
The X-ray imaging apparatus is a dental X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus,
The first, second, third, and fourth speed patterns are speed patterns for scanning the X-rays so as to optimally focus on a reference tomographic plane that is set in advance for the dentition of the subject. The X-ray imaging apparatus according to claim 11, wherein:
 前記X線撮影装置は歯科用のX線パノラマ撮影装置であり、
 前記第1、第2、第3、及び第4の速度パターンは、被検者の歯列に対して予め設定されている基準断層面に直交するように前記X線ビームを照射し且つ当該基準断層面を最適焦点化するように前記X線をスキャンさせる速度パターンであることを特徴とする請求項11に記載のX線撮影装置。
The X-ray imaging apparatus is a dental X-ray panoramic imaging apparatus,
The first, second, third, and fourth velocity patterns irradiate the X-ray beam so as to be orthogonal to a reference tomographic plane that is set in advance with respect to the dentition of the subject, and the reference The X-ray imaging apparatus according to claim 11, wherein the X-ray imaging apparatus is a speed pattern that scans the X-ray so as to optimize a tomographic plane.
 前記速度パターンは、前記中心軸の周りの所定角度範囲をスキャンするときの時間を横軸に採り、その所定角度範囲の角度を縦軸に採ったパターンであり、
 前記速度パターンを予め設定して記憶している記憶手段と、
 前記スキャン時に前記記憶手段から前記速度パターンの情報を読み出して前記制御手段に提供する読出し手段と、を備えた
ことを特徴とする請求項8~13の何れか一項に記載のX線撮影装置。
The speed pattern is a pattern in which the horizontal axis represents time when scanning a predetermined angle range around the central axis, and the vertical axis represents the angle of the predetermined angle range,
Storage means for presetting and storing the speed pattern;
The X-ray imaging apparatus according to any one of claims 8 to 13, further comprising a reading unit that reads information on the speed pattern from the storage unit and provides the information to the control unit during the scan. .
 前記X線管アーム及び前記検出器アームを回動可能に保持し、且つ前記X線管アーム及び前記検出器アームが前記特定部位の周りを回転することを許容する撮影空間を提供する昇降機と、
 この昇降機を搭載した台座部と、
 前記撮影空間を画成するように位置し、且つ前記X線を遮蔽する遮蔽材料で形成された遮蔽体と、
 を備えたことを特徴とする請求項2に記載のX線撮影装置。
An elevator that rotatably supports the X-ray tube arm and the detector arm and provides an imaging space that allows the X-ray tube arm and the detector arm to rotate around the specific portion;
A pedestal part equipped with this elevator,
A shield formed of a shielding material that is positioned so as to define the imaging space and shields the X-ray;
The X-ray imaging apparatus according to claim 2, further comprising:
 前記昇降機は、前記撮影空間の底面側の縁を画成する、前記昇降機の一部を成す底面部を備え、
 前記遮蔽体は、
被検者の特定部位が前記撮影空間に位置するときの当該被検者の体軸方向に沿って配置され且つ当該特定部位の左右の両側に位置する左右の壁体と、当該左右の壁体と一体に形成され且つ前記特定部位の上側に位置する天井体とを備えた第1の遮蔽体と、
前記底面部に内蔵された第2の遮蔽体と、
を備えたことを特徴とする請求項15に記載のX線撮影装置。
The elevator includes a bottom surface part defining a part of the elevator, defining an edge on a bottom surface side of the imaging space,
The shield is
Left and right wall bodies arranged along the body axis direction of the subject when the specific part of the subject is located in the imaging space and located on both the left and right sides of the specific part, and the left and right wall bodies A first shielding body including a ceiling body that is integrally formed with and located above the specific part;
A second shield incorporated in the bottom surface;
The X-ray imaging apparatus according to claim 15, comprising:
 前記第1の遮蔽体は、前記昇降機に対して前記体軸方向にスライド可能に構成されていることを特徴とする請求項16に記載のX線撮影装置。 The X-ray imaging apparatus according to claim 16, wherein the first shield is configured to be slidable in the body axis direction with respect to the elevator.  前記第1の遮蔽体の天井部は平坦な平坦部分を有することを特徴とする請求項16または17に記載のX線撮影装置。 The X-ray imaging apparatus according to claim 16 or 17, wherein the ceiling portion of the first shield has a flat portion.  前記第1の遮蔽体は鉛を含有した樹脂製材料で形成され、
 前記左右の壁体と前記天井体は一体に形成されている、ことを特徴とする請求項18に記載のX線撮影装置。
The first shield is formed of a resin material containing lead,
The X-ray imaging apparatus according to claim 18, wherein the left and right wall bodies and the ceiling body are integrally formed.
 前記第1の遮蔽体は、前記X線を遮蔽し且つ光を透過する透光性領域を部分的に有することを特徴とする請求項18に記載のX線撮影装置。 19. The X-ray imaging apparatus according to claim 18, wherein the first shield partly has a translucent region that shields the X-ray and transmits light.  前記透光性領域は少なくとも前記平坦部分の一部または全部に存在することを特徴とする請求項20に記載のX線撮影装置。 21. The X-ray imaging apparatus according to claim 20, wherein the translucent region is present at least in part or all of the flat portion.  前記昇降機は、前記撮影空間の底面側の縁を画成して当該昇降機の一部を成す背面部を備え、
 前記遮蔽体は、前記背面部に位置する第3の遮蔽体を備えたことを特徴とする請求項16~21の何れか一項に記載のX線撮影装置。
The elevator includes a back surface portion that defines a bottom edge of the imaging space and forms a part of the elevator,
The X-ray imaging apparatus according to any one of claims 16 to 21, wherein the shield includes a third shield positioned on the back surface portion.
 前記遮蔽体は、前記被検者の特定部位が前記撮影空間に位置決めされた後、前記撮影空間の前側の縁を成す前記昇降機の前面に、当該前面を略覆い且つ前記X線を遮蔽する第4の遮蔽体を着脱自在に取り付け可能な第4の遮蔽体を備えたことを特徴とする請求項16~22の何れか一項に記載のX線撮影装置。 After the specific part of the subject is positioned in the imaging space, the shield substantially covers the front surface of the elevator which forms the front edge of the imaging space and shields the X-ray. The X-ray imaging apparatus according to any one of claims 16 to 22, further comprising a fourth shielding body to which the four shielding bodies can be detachably attached.  前記台座部に設けられ、且つ当該装置全体を移動させることが可能な移動手段を備えたことを特徴とする請求項15~23の何れか一項に記載のX線撮影装置。 The X-ray imaging apparatus according to any one of claims 15 to 23, further comprising moving means provided on the pedestal portion and capable of moving the entire apparatus.  前記移動手段は、前記台座部にも取り付けられたキャスタを備えることを特徴とする請求項24に記載のX線撮影装置。 25. The X-ray imaging apparatus according to claim 24, wherein the moving means includes a caster attached to the pedestal portion.  前記X線撮影装置は、歯科用治療椅子の後ろまで移動して当該歯科用治療椅子の後部側に位置付け、当該歯科用治療椅子に仰向けに横たわった被検者の頭部を前記X線管と前記検出器と間の撮影空間に位置決めしてX線撮影を行う装置であって、
 操作者が操作する操作部と、
 この操作部に与えられた操作を伝える伝達手段と、
 前記椅子に対する当該X線撮影装置の横付けるときの所定位置を指定する位置指定手段と、
 前記伝達手段が伝えた前記操作に応じて前記位置指定手段に係止して当該X線撮影装置を前記所定位置に固定する固定手段と、
 を備えたことを特徴とする請求項2に記載のX線撮影装置。
The X-ray imaging apparatus moves to the back of the dental treatment chair, is positioned on the rear side of the dental treatment chair, and the head of the subject lying on the back on the dental treatment chair is the X-ray tube. An apparatus for performing X-ray imaging by positioning in an imaging space between the detector and
An operation unit operated by an operator;
A transmission means for transmitting an operation given to the operation unit;
Position specifying means for specifying a predetermined position when the X-ray imaging apparatus is laid on the chair;
A fixing means for locking the X-ray imaging apparatus at the predetermined position by locking the position specifying means according to the operation transmitted by the transmission means;
The X-ray imaging apparatus according to claim 2, further comprising:
 前記位置指定手段は、前記椅子に近接した床上の前記所定位置に固設される固定フレームであり、
 前記固定手段は、前記伝達手段が伝えてきた前記操作に応じて突出するピンと、このピンを駆動させて当該ピンを前記固定フレームに係止させるピン駆動機構とを備える、
 ことを特徴とする請求項26に記載のX線撮影装置。
The position specifying means is a fixed frame fixed at the predetermined position on the floor close to the chair,
The fixing means includes a pin protruding in response to the operation transmitted by the transmission means, and a pin driving mechanism for driving the pin and locking the pin to the fixing frame.
27. The X-ray imaging apparatus according to claim 26.
 前記固定フレームには、前記ピンが挿入される穴が穿設されていることを特徴とする請求項27に記載のX線撮影装置。 28. The X-ray imaging apparatus according to claim 27, wherein a hole into which the pin is inserted is formed in the fixed frame.  前記操作部は、操作者が手動で操作可能な操作レバーであり、
 この操作レバーは、操作されていないときの初期位置と、操作者が当該初期位置から第1段目及び第2段目の3段階の操作位置に渡って手動で順に段階的に操作可能な2つのレバー位置とを採り、且つその逆の順に復帰可能な構造を有し、
 前記ピンは、前記初期位置から前記第1段目のレバー位置への前記操作レバーの操作に付勢されて第1段階として突出し、前記第1段目のレバー位置から前記第2段目のレバー位置への前記操作に付勢されて更に第2段階として突出する位置決めピンを備え、
 前記固定フレームは、前記第1段階で突出した前記ピンが挿入される長溝と、この長溝の底面に穿設され且つ前記第2段階で突出した前記ピンが挿入される穴部と、を有する
 ことを特徴とする請求項27に記載のX線撮影装置。
The operation unit is an operation lever that can be manually operated by an operator,
The operation lever can be operated in a step-by-step manner in order from the initial position when the operation lever is not operated and the operator from the initial position to the three-stage operation positions of the first stage and the second stage. It has a structure that takes two lever positions and can be returned in the reverse order,
The pin is urged by the operation of the operation lever from the initial position to the first-stage lever position and protrudes as a first stage, and the second-stage lever from the first-stage lever position. A positioning pin that is urged by the operation to a position and protrudes as a second stage;
The fixed frame has a long groove into which the pin protruding in the first stage is inserted, and a hole portion which is formed in the bottom surface of the long groove and into which the pin protruded in the second stage is inserted. The X-ray imaging apparatus according to claim 27.
 前記位置決めピンは複数のピンで構成され、且つ当該X線撮影装置の前面の下部から下方に前記ピン駆動機構により突出可能に保持されている、ことを特徴とする請求項29に記載のX線撮影装置。 30. The X-ray according to claim 29, wherein the positioning pin includes a plurality of pins, and is held so as to protrude downward from a lower portion of a front surface of the X-ray imaging apparatus by the pin driving mechanism. Shooting device.  前記固定手段は、停止用ピンを備え、
 前記固定フレームは、当該固定フレームが床面に固設された状態で、当該X線撮影装置を前記歯科用治療椅子にアクセスさせる方向に向き、且つ前記停止用ピンの当接を受けて当該停止用ピンの前進を止めるストッパ面を有し、
 前記穴部は、前記ストッパ面の下端に連なった位置に穿設されている、ことを特徴とする請求項29または30に記載のX線撮影装置。
The fixing means includes a stop pin,
The fixed frame is oriented in a direction to allow the X-ray imaging apparatus to access the dental treatment chair in a state where the fixed frame is fixed to the floor, and the stop is received by the contact of the stop pin. Has a stopper surface to stop the forward movement of the pin
31. The X-ray imaging apparatus according to claim 29, wherein the hole is formed at a position continuous with a lower end of the stopper surface.
 前記位置決めピン及び前記停止用ピンは横一線に並んでいる、ことを特徴とする請求31に記載のX線撮影装置。 32. The X-ray imaging apparatus according to claim 31, wherein the positioning pins and the stopping pins are aligned in a horizontal line.  前記位置決めピン及び前記停止用ピンはそれぞれ2本のピンで構成され、
 前記穴部は、前記2本の位置決めピンそれぞれに嵌合可能な2つの穴部から成る、ことを特徴とする請求項31または32に記載のX線撮影装置。
The positioning pin and the stop pin are each composed of two pins,
The X-ray imaging apparatus according to claim 31 or 32, wherein the hole portion includes two hole portions that can be fitted into the two positioning pins, respectively.
 前記伝達手段は、前記操作レバーに加えられた操作者の操作力を前記ピン駆動機構に伝えるワイヤーを備える、ことを特徴とする請求項26~33の何れか一項に記載のX線撮影装置。 The X-ray imaging apparatus according to any one of claims 26 to 33, wherein the transmission means includes a wire that transmits an operation force of an operator applied to the operation lever to the pin driving mechanism. .  前記X線管を被検者の特定部位の周りに回動可能に保持するX線管アームと、
 前記検出器を前記特定部位の周りに回動可能に保持する検出器アームと、
 前記X線管アーム及び前記検出器アームを回動可能に保持し、且つ前記X線管アーム及び前記検出器アームが前記被検者の撮影部位の周りを回転することを許容する撮影空間を提供する昇降機と、
 この昇降機を搭載した台座部と、
 この台座部に取り付けられ、当該装置を移動可能に支持する移動支持手段と、
 を更に備えたことを特徴とする請求項26~34の何れか一項に記載のX線撮影装置。
An X-ray tube arm that rotatably holds the X-ray tube around a specific part of the subject;
A detector arm that rotatably holds the detector around the specific part;
An imaging space for rotatably holding the X-ray tube arm and the detector arm and allowing the X-ray tube arm and the detector arm to rotate around the imaging region of the subject is provided. An elevator to
A pedestal part equipped with this elevator,
A moving support means attached to the pedestal portion and movably supporting the device;
The X-ray imaging apparatus according to any one of claims 26 to 34, further comprising:
 前記撮影空間を画成するように位置し、且つ前記X線を遮蔽する遮蔽材料で形成された遮蔽体を備えたことを特徴とする請求項35に記載のX線撮影装置。 36. The X-ray imaging apparatus according to claim 35, further comprising a shielding body that is positioned so as to define the imaging space and is formed of a shielding material that shields the X-ray.  X線を照射するX線管と、
 このX線管を被検者の特定部位の周りに回動可能に保持するX線管アームと、
 前記X線を検出して当該X線の量に応じた信号を出力する検出器と、
 この検出器を前記特定部位の周りに回動可能に保持する検出器アームと、
 前記X線管アーム及び前記検出器アームを回動可能に保持し、且つ前記X線管アーム及び前記検出器アームが前記特定部位の周りを回転することを許容する撮影空間を提供する昇降機と、
 この昇降機を搭載した台座部と、
 前記撮影空間を画成するように位置し、且つ前記X線を遮蔽する遮蔽材料で形成された遮蔽体と、
 ことを特徴とする可搬型のX線撮影装置。
An X-ray tube that emits X-rays;
An X-ray tube arm that rotatably holds the X-ray tube around a specific part of the subject;
A detector that detects the X-ray and outputs a signal corresponding to the amount of the X-ray;
A detector arm that rotatably holds the detector around the specific part;
An elevator that rotatably supports the X-ray tube arm and the detector arm and provides an imaging space that allows the X-ray tube arm and the detector arm to rotate around the specific portion;
A pedestal part equipped with this elevator,
A shield formed of a shielding material that is positioned so as to define the imaging space and shields the X-ray;
A portable X-ray imaging apparatus characterized by that.
 歯科用治療椅子のサイドに位置付けて当該椅子に仰向けに横たわった被検者の頭部に当該頭部の周りを回りながらX線を照射するX線管と、当該頭部の周りを回転しながら前記頭部を透過してきた前記X線を検出する検出器とを備えた可搬型の歯科用X線撮影装置において、
 操作者が操作する操作部と、
 この操作部に与えられた操作を伝える伝達手段と、
 前記椅子に対する当該X線撮影装置の横付けるときの所定位置を指定する位置指定手段と、
 前記伝達手段が伝えた前記操作に応じて前記位置指定手段に係止して当該X線撮影装置を前記所定位置に固定する固定手段と、
 を備えたことを特徴とするX線撮影装置。
An X-ray tube that irradiates the subject's head positioned on the side of the dental treatment chair and lying on his back on the chair while irradiating X-rays while rotating around the head, and rotating around the head In a portable dental X-ray imaging apparatus provided with a detector that detects the X-ray transmitted through the head,
An operation unit operated by an operator;
A transmission means for transmitting an operation given to the operation unit;
Position specifying means for specifying a predetermined position when the X-ray imaging apparatus is laid on the chair;
A fixing means for locking the X-ray imaging apparatus at the predetermined position by locking the position specifying means according to the operation transmitted by the transmission means;
An X-ray imaging apparatus comprising:
PCT/JP2015/052745 2014-02-21 2015-01-30 X-ray imaging apparatus Ceased WO2015125589A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2014-031911 2014-02-21
JP2014031911A JP2015156886A (en) 2014-02-21 2014-02-21 X-ray imaging apparatus and scattered radiation shielding apparatus mounted on the apparatus
JP2014-035619 2014-02-26
JP2014035619 2014-02-26
JP2014-037037 2014-02-27
JP2014-037568 2014-02-27
JP2014037568 2014-02-27
JP2014037037A JP2015159973A (en) 2014-02-27 2014-02-27 X-ray equipment

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2015125589A1 true WO2015125589A1 (en) 2015-08-27

Family

ID=53878101

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2015/052745 Ceased WO2015125589A1 (en) 2014-02-21 2015-01-30 X-ray imaging apparatus

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2015125589A1 (en)

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2018095232A1 (en) * 2016-11-22 2018-05-31 浙江思格一医疗科技有限公司 Non-weighted radiation protection device
EP3586751A4 (en) * 2017-02-23 2020-11-04 J. Morita Manufacturing Corporation X-RAY TOMOGRAPHY AND X-RAY TOMOGRAPHY METHODS
CN112055562A (en) * 2018-04-27 2020-12-08 株式会社森田制作所 X-ray CT imaging device and control method of X-ray CT imaging device
FR3161103A1 (en) * 2024-04-15 2025-10-17 Thales Advanced Mobile X-ray Imaging Device

Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH11299773A (en) * 1998-04-16 1999-11-02 Asahi Roentgen Kogyo Kk Portable panoramic x-ray photographing device adaptable to side lying position
JP2001518341A (en) * 1997-10-02 2001-10-16 プランメカ オイ Head X-ray equipment
US6325538B1 (en) * 2000-03-17 2001-12-04 Christian M. Heesch Radiation field isolator apparatus
US20070189442A1 (en) * 2006-02-14 2007-08-16 Predrag Sukovic Self-shielded ct scanner
JP2009516845A (en) * 2005-11-23 2009-04-23 コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エレクトロニクス エヌ ヴィ Radiation shielding of tomographic scanners
JP2010213729A (en) * 2007-07-06 2010-09-30 Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic Inc Radiographic imaging system
JP2011056265A (en) * 2009-09-11 2011-03-24 Siemens Ag Apparatus for flexibly positioning radiation source and radiation detector for medical imaging
JP2012531287A (en) * 2009-07-01 2012-12-10 パロデックス グループ オイ Moving mechanism for dental X-ray equipment
JP2013169329A (en) * 2012-02-21 2013-09-02 Yoshida Dental Mfg Co Ltd X-ray imaging apparatus

Patent Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2001518341A (en) * 1997-10-02 2001-10-16 プランメカ オイ Head X-ray equipment
JPH11299773A (en) * 1998-04-16 1999-11-02 Asahi Roentgen Kogyo Kk Portable panoramic x-ray photographing device adaptable to side lying position
US6325538B1 (en) * 2000-03-17 2001-12-04 Christian M. Heesch Radiation field isolator apparatus
JP2009516845A (en) * 2005-11-23 2009-04-23 コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エレクトロニクス エヌ ヴィ Radiation shielding of tomographic scanners
US20070189442A1 (en) * 2006-02-14 2007-08-16 Predrag Sukovic Self-shielded ct scanner
JP2010213729A (en) * 2007-07-06 2010-09-30 Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic Inc Radiographic imaging system
JP2012531287A (en) * 2009-07-01 2012-12-10 パロデックス グループ オイ Moving mechanism for dental X-ray equipment
JP2011056265A (en) * 2009-09-11 2011-03-24 Siemens Ag Apparatus for flexibly positioning radiation source and radiation detector for medical imaging
JP2013169329A (en) * 2012-02-21 2013-09-02 Yoshida Dental Mfg Co Ltd X-ray imaging apparatus

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2018095232A1 (en) * 2016-11-22 2018-05-31 浙江思格一医疗科技有限公司 Non-weighted radiation protection device
EP3586751A4 (en) * 2017-02-23 2020-11-04 J. Morita Manufacturing Corporation X-RAY TOMOGRAPHY AND X-RAY TOMOGRAPHY METHODS
US11045152B2 (en) 2017-02-23 2021-06-29 J. Morita Mfg. Corp. X-ray tomography apparatus and X-ray tomography method
CN112055562A (en) * 2018-04-27 2020-12-08 株式会社森田制作所 X-ray CT imaging device and control method of X-ray CT imaging device
CN112055562B (en) * 2018-04-27 2024-03-01 株式会社森田制作所 X-ray CT imaging device and control method for X-ray CT imaging device
FR3161103A1 (en) * 2024-04-15 2025-10-17 Thales Advanced Mobile X-ray Imaging Device

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11998379B2 (en) Three dimensional X-ray imaging system
JP3926334B2 (en) X-ray CT imaging system
JP3926120B2 (en) X-ray imaging position setting means for an object, and X-ray imaging apparatus provided with this means
JP5878121B2 (en) X-ray tomography system
EP2774540B1 (en) Medical x-ray photography apparatus
US8538110B2 (en) Medical X-ray CT imaging apparatus, medical X-ray CT image display device, and medical X-ray CT image display method
JP4997635B2 (en) Panoramic image photographing apparatus and image processing method in panoramic photographing
JP4503654B2 (en) Display method of X-ray CT image of dentomaxillofacial surface, X-ray CT tomography apparatus, and X-ray image display apparatus
JP2010046360A (en) X-ray image display method and radiography apparatus
JP2015156886A (en) X-ray imaging apparatus and scattered radiation shielding apparatus mounted on the apparatus
EP2708188B1 (en) X-ray imaging apparatus
JP2015177963A (en) X-ray imaging apparatus and teaching apparatus
KR20160094565A (en) X-ray Generator For Intraoral X-ray Photographing and System Comprising The Same
KR101659177B1 (en) Apparatus for arranging a examinee&#39;s head of dental in dental clinic
CN109419527B (en) CT imaging apparatus, information processing apparatus, CT imaging method, and information processing method
WO2015125589A1 (en) X-ray imaging apparatus
JP6521648B2 (en) X-ray imaging device
JP2012061016A (en) X-ray ct photographing device and display method of x-ray ct image
US20160151027A1 (en) X-Ray Photography Apparatus, Image Processing Device, and X-Ray Photography Method
US20220225952A1 (en) Three dimensional x-ray imaging system
US20220133249A1 (en) Three dimensional x-ray imaging system
JP5798016B2 (en) X-ray equipment
JP2015159973A (en) X-ray equipment
JP2014161636A (en) X-ray imaging system and x-ray imaging portion teaching method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 15752758

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 15752758

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1